2

Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.

Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
 4

Founder’s Message
Dear Student,

It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.

Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

 We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
 For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
 Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
 Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
 First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
 Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
 Your success is our dream-come-true

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 5

Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt

Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.

Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain

Physics Team

Teachers SME DTP

Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Rohit Thakur
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan
Pritesh Ranjan
Ravneet Wadhwa

A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.

Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran

Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.

The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

RAY OPTICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 8

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 29

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 44

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 52

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 61

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 71

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 129

WAVE OPTICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 83

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 94

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 103

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 110

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 115

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 124

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 131

Teacher’s Note:

This is one of the most practical chapter which you can

actually feel.Reflection, refraction are the phenomenon which

we encounter in our day to day life. Physics, little bit

mathematics, good obervation skills and this chapter is a

delight to solve.Questions from this topic are definitely asked

and are simple helpful in easy scoring.

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
 01
RAY OPTICS
 Chapter 01 9

RAY OPTICS THEORY

1. RECTILINEAR PROPAGATION OF LIGHT As shown in the figure, the angle between reflected ray and
incident ray is180 – 2i where i is the angle of incidence. Maximum
It is a well established fact that light is a wave. Although, a light deviation is 180°, when angle of incident i is zero.
wave spreads as it moves away from its source, we can approximate
its path as a straight line. Under this approximation, we show light 2.3 Law of Reflection in Vector Form
as a ray and the study of light as a ray is called ray optics or
geometrical optics. Say unit vector along incident ray = i .

1.1 Ray Unit vector along normal = n̂

The straight line path along which light travels in a homogeneous Unit vector along surface = t
medium is called a ray.
Unit vector along reflected ray = r̂

Ray i  sin  t  cos  n

2. REFLECTION OF LIGHT r  sin  t  cos  n

The phenomenon in which a light ray is sent back into the same
Hence r  i  2 cos  n
medium from which it is coming, on interaction with a boundary,
is called reflection. The boundary can be a rigid surface or just an
interface between two media.  r  i  2 cos  n

2.1 Law of Reflection Since

We have few angles to define before considering law of reflection i.n  11 cos(180  )
(i) Angle of incidence : The angle which the incident ray
  cos 
makes with normal at the point of incidence.
(ii) Angle of reflection : The angle which the reflected ray Then rˆ  i  2 i.nˆ nˆ
 
makes with normal at the point of incidence.
A reflected ray lies in the plane of incidence and has an angle of
reflection equal to the angle of incidence. i = r.
2.2 Deviation
When a ray of light suffers reflection, its path is changed. The
angle between its direction after reflection and the direction before
reflection is called the deviation.
Laws of reflection remain the same whether the reflected surface is
plane or curved.

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 10

2.4 Reflection by a plane surface When an object is placed in front of a plane mirror, its image can
be seen behind the mirror. The distance of the object from the
Suppose a reflecting surface is rotated by an angle  (say mirror is equal to the distance of the image from the mirror.
anticlockwise), keeping the incident ray fixed then the reflect ray
rotates by 2 along the same sense, i.e., anticlockwise.

(AB is common and all angle are equal  OA = IA)

Magnification of a plane mirror is unity.
The image is formed behind the mirror. It is erect. Virtual and
laterally inverted.
Image formation by two inclined mirrors, inclined at angle
=  [0, 180°]
The object and all its images will always lie on a circle, having
2.5 Reflection from plane mirror center at the point of intersection of the two inclined mirrors, in a
two dimensional view.

3. OTHER IMPORTANT INFORMATIONS

(i) When the object moves with speed u towards (or away) from
the plane mirror then image also moves toward (or away) with
speed u. But relative speed of image w.r.t. object is 2u.
(ii) When mirror moves towards the stationary object with speed
u, the image will move with speed 2u.

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 11

4. SPHERICAL MIRRORS Paraxial rays : Rays which are close to principal axis and make
small angles with it, i.e., they are nearly parallel to the axis, are
A spherical mirror is a part of sphere. If one of the surfaces is
called paraxial rays. Our treatment of spherical mirrors will be
silvered, the other surface acts as the reflecting surface. When
restricted to such rays which means we shall consider only mirrors
convex face is silvered, and the reflecting surface is concave, the
of small aperture. In diagrams, however, they will be made larger
mirror is called a concave mirror. When its concave face is silvered
for clarity.
and convex face is the reflecting face, the mirror is called a convex
mirror. Images formed by spherical mirrors
Let us consider various cases depending on the nature of the
object and the image
(i) Real object and real image

(a)

Before the discussion of reflection by curved mirrors, you shall

carefully comprehend the meaning of following terms
(i) Centre of curvature : Centre of curvature is the centre of
sphere of which, the mirror is a part.
(ii) Radius of curvature : Radius of curvature is the radius of
sphere of which, the mirror is a part.
(b)
(iii) Pole of mirror : Pole is the geometric centre of the mirror.
(iv) Principal axis : Principal axis is the line passing through the
pole and centre of curvature.
(v) Normal : Any line joining the mirror to its centre of curvature
is a normal. (ii) Real object and virtual image

(a)

(b)

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 12

object two of the following four rays are drawn passing through
the object. To construct the image of an extended object the image
of two end points is only drawn. The image of a point object lying
on principles axis is formed on the principal axis itself. The four
(c) rays are as under :

O
I

(d)
P F C
1

3
(iii) Virtual object and real image 4
P F C

Ray 1 : A ray through the centre of curvature which strikes the

(a)
C F I P O mirror normally and is reflected back along the same path.
Ray 2 : A ray parallel to principal axis after reflection either actually
passes through the principal focus F or appears to diverge from it.
Ray 3 : A ray passing through the principal focus F or a ray which
appears to converge at F is reflected parallel to the principal axis.
Ray 4 : A ray striking at pole P is reflected symmetrically back in
the opposite side.
4.1 Sign conventions
(b)
I P O F C
(i) All distances are measured from the pole.
(ii) Distances measured in the direction of incident rays are
taken as positive while in the direction opposite of incident
rays are taken negative.
(iv) Virtual object and virtual image (iii) Distances above the principle axis are taken positive and
below the principle axis are taken negative.

P F O C I

Ray diagrams
Note:
We shall consider the small objects and mirrors of small aperture
Same sign convention are also valid for lenses.
so that all rays are paraxial. To construct the image of a point

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 13

Position, size and nature of image formed by the spherical mirror

Mirror Location of Location of Magnification, Nature

the object the image Size of the
image Real Erect
virtual inverted

(a) Concave At focus m << 1, Real inverted

i.e. v = f diminished

Away from centre Between f and m < 1, Real inverted

of curvature 2f i.e. diminished
(u > 2f) f < v < 2f

C F P At centre of At centre of m = 1, same size Real inverted

curvature u = 2f curvature i.e. as that of the
v = 2f object

Between centre of Away from the m > 1, magnified Real inverted

curvature and centre of
focus : curvature
F < u < 2f v > 2f

At focus i.e. u = f Real

Between pole and v>u m > 1 magnified Virtual erect

focus u < f
(b) Convex At focus i.e., m < 1, diminished Virtual erect
v=f

P F C Anywhere between Between pole m < 1, diminished Virtual erect

infinity and pole and focus

Use following sign while solving the problem

Concave mirror
Convex mirror
Real image (u > f) Virtual image (u < f)
Distance of object
Distance of image
Focal length
Height of object
Height of image
Radius of curvature
Magnification

4.2 Relation between f and R

In figure, P is pole, C is centre of curvature and F is principal focus of a concave mirror of small aperture. Let a ray of light AB be
incident on the mirror in a direction parallel to the principal axis of the mirror. It gets reflected along. BF. Join CB. It is normal to
the mirror at B.

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 14

i.e., F is the centre of PC

1
 PF = PC, Using sign conventions,
2
PF = – f and PC = –R.
Therefore, –f = –R/2 or f = R/2
i.e., focal length of a concave mirror is equal to half the
 ABC = i, angle of incidence
radius of curvature of the mirror.
CBF = r, angle of reflection
4.3 Deriving the Mirror Formula
Now BCF = ABC = i (alternate angles)
In CBF, as i = r (law of reflection) Mirror formula can be derived for any of the cases of image
formation shown before. When we derive a formula, we keep in
 CF = FB
mind the sign conventions and substitute each value with sign.
But FB = FP ( aperture is small) This makes a formula suitable to be applied in any case. Here, we
 CF = FP shall derive the formula for two cases.

Real object and real image Real object and virtual image
(concave mirror) (convex mirror)

PO = – u (distance of object) PO = – u (distance of object)

PC = – R (radius of curvature) PI = + v (distance of image)
PI = – v (distance of image) PC = + R (radius of curvature)
In OAC, =  +  ...(i) In OAC,  =  +  ...(i)
In OAI, =  + 2 ...(ii) In OAI, 2 =  +  ...(ii)
From (i) and (ii) From (i) and (ii)
2 ( – ) =  –  2 ( + ) =  + 
+  = 2 – = 2

AP AP AP AP AP AP
 , ,  , ,
PI PO PC PI PO PC

AP AP 2AP AP AP 2AP
   
PI PO PC PI PO PC

1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
         
v u R v u f v u R v u f

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 15

While deriving the above result, if we do not use sign convention, 1 1 1

results obtained will be different for different cases. From ,   we have –v–2dv –u–2du = 0
v u f
4.4 Magnification 2
dv v
or   
The linear magnification produced by a mirror is defined as du u
height of image 2
m = height of object dv  v 
or mL       m2
du  u 
I  BB If we differentiate the mirror formula
m 
O AA  1 1 1
 
v u f
with respect to time, we get
dv du (as f = constant)
 v 2 .  u 2 0
dt dt

dv  v 2  du
or   2  ...(iii)
dt  u  dt
As every part of mirror forms a complete image, if a part of the
mirror is obstructed, full image will be formed but intensity will be
PB = – v (distance of image) reduced.
PA = – u (distance of object) 5. REFRACTION OF LIGHT
BB BP
Now, A’AP ~ B’BP  
AA AP

 PB   v   v
 m  
PA  u  u
Note:-

By mirror formula, 1  1  1
v u f
v v v f v
 1   m  1  When a ray of light is incident on the boundary between two
u f f f transparent media, a part of it passes into the second medium
1 1 1 u u f with a change in direction.
Also,     11  m
v u f v f f u This phenomenon is called refraction.
v f  v f 5.1 Refractive Index
m  
u f f u
Absolute refractive index of a medium is defined by the ratio of
The magnification is negative when image is inverted and positive
c
when image is erect. speed of light in vacuum to speed of light in the medium   ,
v
If an object is placed with its length along the principal axis, then
where c is speed of light in vacuum and v is the speed of light in
so called longitudinal magnification becomes,
the medium.
I  v  v1  dv 5.2 Law of Refraction (Snell’s Law)
mL    2    (for small objects)
O u
 2  u 1  du
A refracted ray lies in the plane of incidence and has an angle of
refraction related to angle of incidence by 1sin i = 2 sin r. Where,

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 16

(i) i = angle of incidence in medium 1 5.3 Single Refraction from a Plane Surface
(ii) 1 = refractive index of medium 1 (it is a dimensionless constant) Real and Apparent Depth
(iii) r = angle of refraction in medium 2 When an object placed in a medium is seen from another medium,
(iv) 2 = refractive index of medium 2 its apparent position is different from the actual position. Consider
the following figure.
(v) If 1 = 2, then r = i. The light beam does not bend
(vi) If 1 > 2, then r > i. Refraction bends the light away from normal
(vii) If 1 < 2, then r < i. Refraction bends the light towards the normal
r
A medium having greater refractive index is called denser medium A B
while the other medium is called rarer medium.
i r Apparent depth A
Rarer medium I Real depth R
i

i O

We shall derive the expression for small angles (or you can say
Denser medium that the object is being seen from top). By Snell’s law,
r
Incident ray
2 × sin i = 1 × sin r or, 2 × i = 1 × r
Bent
Normal AB AB AB AB  2 1
i ,r  2   1   
R A R A R A

The following possibilities may arise.

Rarer medium Incident ray
(i) When observer is in air and the object is in a medium of
Bent refractive index ,
r
 1 R
You have,  A
R A 
Denser medium i

The three conditions required to find the unit vector along the
refracted ray = r (provided we are given the unit vector along the

incident ray = i , and the normal unit vector n shown in the 

figure, from medium–1 towards medium–2) are
(ii) When observer is in a medium of refractive index  and
1. r  1 the object is in air, you have

2. Snell’s law : i  n  1 r  n
  1 
  A  R
2 R A
3. iˆ , n̂ and r̂ are coplanar  STP = 0
I

   
 iˆ   nˆ  rˆ   nˆ  rˆ  iˆ  rˆ  nˆ  iˆ  0
A O
R
Note:- Air

cos i = i.n ; cos r = r.n

   

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 17

5.4 Shift due to a Glass Slab (Double Refraction AC t

from Plane Surfaces) Proof : AB  
cos r cos r
(i) Normal Shift : Here, again two cases are possible. (as AC = t)
C E t
Now, d = AB sin (i – r) = cos r [sin i cos r – cos i sin r]

M N
or d = t [sin i – cos i tan r] ...(i)

I1 O I A B sin i sin i
Further   or sin r 
sin r 

D F
sin i
 tan r 
  sin 2 i
2

An object is placed at O. Plane surface CD forms its image (virtual)

Substituting in eq. (i), we get,
at I1. This image acts as object for EF which finally forms the
image (virtual) at I. Distance OI is called the normal shift and its  
cos i
value is, d  1   t sin i
  2
 sin 2 
i
 
 1
OI  1   t
  Hence Proved.
This can be proved as under : Exercise : Show that for small angles of incidence,
Let OA = x then AI1 = x (Refraction from CD)
  1
BI1 = x + t d = ti   .
  
BI1 t
BI  x (Refraction from EF) Apparent distance from observer
 
 t  h1 h 2 hn 
 OI = (AB + OA) – BI  t  x    x   =  obser      ......  
    1 2 n 
 1 5.5 Total Internal Reflection
 1   t Hence Proved.
 
Consider an object placed in a denser medium 2 (having refractive
(ii) Lateral Shift : We have already discussed that ray MA is
index 2) being seen from a rarer medium 1 (having refractive
parallel to ray BN. But the emergent ray is displaced
index 1)
laterally by a distance d, which depends on , t and i and
its value is given by the relation,
 cos i 
d  t 1   sin i
 2 2 
   sin i 

Different rays from the object are shown. As we move from A

towards C, angle of incidence goes on increasing. Therefore, the
angle of refraction goes on increasing. At B, angle of refraction
approaches 90°. This is called critical condition. After B, angle of

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 18

incidence increases, but angle of refraction cannot be greater

   r , in fig. I
than 90°. Therefore after point B, refraction of light does not take i    ,   
place, only reflection of light takes place. This is called total internal r   , in fig. II
reflection.
1       2     in fig. I and fig. II
5.6 Refraction through Curved Surfaces
 1   2    2  1 ,
Spherical Refracting Surfaces
A spherical refracting surface is a part of a sphere. For example,
the plane face of cylindrical glass rod is curved to form a spherical B r
i
shape (as shown in the figure).

O I P'

As aperture is small   tan ,   tan  ,   tan 

1 tan   2 tan    2  1  tan 

 1  2  2  1
  ...(i)
PO P I P C
Applying sign convention i.e., u = – P’O
v = P’I and – P’I, in fig. I and fig. II respectively R = P’C
Substituting the above values in equation (i), we get
P  Pole of refracting surface  2 1  2  1
  (For both fig. I and fig. II)
C  Centre of curvature v u R
PC  Radius of curvature 5.8 Linear Magnification for Spherical Refracting Surface
Principal axis : The line joining pole and centre of curvature.
m
A B
5.7 Relation between Object Distance and Image AB

Distance Refraction at Spherical Surfaces sin i  2

Now, 
sin r 1
Consider the point object O placed in the medium with refractive
index equal to 1. As 1sin i = 2sin r and for small aperture i, r  0

B
B
i A'
i r
A P
r
B'
O P P' C I

As i, r  0, i  sin i  tan i, r  sin r  tan r

tan i  2 AB / PA 
i.e. paraxial rays 1 i = 2 r  or  2
tan r 1  
A B / PA  1

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 19

towards the point, after refraction becomes parallel to

A B PA  /  2
  principal axis.
AB PA / 1

v / 2
Hence, m 
u / 1

6. THIN LENS
A thin lens is defined as a portion of transparent refracting medium
bounded by two surfaces. One of the two surfaces must be curved.
Following figures show a number of lenses formed by different
refracting surfaces.
A lens is one of the most familiar optical devices for a human
being. A lens is an optical system with two refracting surfaces.
The simplest lens has two spherical surfaces close enough together (b) Second principal focus F2 : It is a point on principal axis,
that we can neglect the distance between them (the thickness of such that a ray moving parallel to principal axis, after
the lens). We call this a thin lens. refraction converges or diverges towards the point.

Biconvex Plano-convex Convex meniscus

(vi) Focal Length : The distance between optical centre and

second principal focus is focal length. Assumptions and
sign conventions are same as these of mirrors with optical
centre C in place of pole P of the mirror.
Biconcave Plano-concave Concave meniscus
6.2 Ray diagram

6.1 Terms Related with Lenses To construct the image of a small object perpendicular to the axis
of a lens, two of the following three rays are drawn from the top of
(i) Centre of curvature (C1 and C2) : The two bounding surfaces the object.
of a lens are each part of a complete sphere. The centre of the 1. A ray parallel to the principal axis after refraction passes
sphere is the centre of curvature. through the principal focus or appears to diverge from it.
(ii) Radius of curvature (R1 and R2) : The radii of the curved
surfaces forming the lens are called radii of curvature.
(iii) Principal axis : The line joining the two centres of
curvature is called principal axis.
(iv) Optical centre : A point on the principal axis of the lens
from which a ray of light passes undeviated.
(v) Principal foci : There are two principal foci of a lens.
(a) First principal focus F1 : It is a point on the principal axis,
such that a ray, diverging from the point or converging

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 20

2. A ray through the optical centre P passes undeviated 3. A ray passing through the first focus F1 become parallel
because the middle of the lens acts like a thin parallel- to the principal axis after refraction.
sided slab.

6.3 Image formation by Lens

Lens Location of Location of Nature of image

the object the image
Magnification Real Erect
virtual inverted

Convex At focus m<1 Real Inverted

i.e. v = f diminished
Away from 2f Between f and 2f m<1 Real Inverted
i.e. (u > 2f) i.e. f < v < 2f diminished
At 2f or (u = 2f) At 2f i.e. (v = 2f) m=1 Real Inverted
same size
Between f and 2f Away from 2f m>1 Real Inverted
2f f f 2f i.e. f < u < 2f i.e. (v > 2f) magnified
At focus i.e. u = f Real Inverted

Between optical At a distance m>1 Virtual Erect

centre and focus, greater than that magnified
u<f of object v > u

Concave At focus m<1 Virtual Erect

i.e. v = f diminished
Anywhere between Between optical Virtual Erect
infinity and centre and focus
optical centre

Note:-

Minimum distance between an object and it’s real image formed by a convex lens is 4f.
Maximum image distance for concave lens is it’s focal length.

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 21

6.4 Lens maker’s formula and lens formula determine the values of R1 and R2 that are needed for a given
refractive index and a desired focal length f.
Consider an object O placed at a distance u from a convex lens as
Combining eqs. (iii) and (v), we get
shown in figure. Let its image I after two refractions from spherical
surfaces of radii R1 (positive) and R2 (negative) be formed at a 1 1 1
  ...(vi)
distance v from the lens. Let v1 be the distance of image formed v u f
by refraction from the refracting surface of radius R1. This image Which is known as the lens formula. Following conclusions can
acts as an object for the second surface. Using, be drawn from eqs. (iv), (v) and (vi).
1. For a converging lens, R1 is positive and R2 is negative.
Incident light
 1 1 
Therefore,    in eq. (v) comes out a positive
R2 R1  R1 R 2 
O C2 C1 I quantity and if the lens is placed in air, ( – 1) is also a
positive quantity. Hence, the focal length f of a converging
+ve lens comes out to be positive. For a diverging lens however,
u v
R1 is negative and R2 is positive and the focal length f
becomes negative.
 2 1  2  1
  twice, we have
v u R

 2 1  2  1
or   ...(i)
v1 u R1

 1  2 1   2
and   ...(ii)
v v1 R2

Adding eqs. (i) and (ii) and then simplifying, we get

1 1  2  1 1 
   1    ...(iii)
v u  1  1 R R 2 

This expression relates the image distance v of the image formed

by a thin lens to the object distance u and to the thin lens properties
(index of refraction and radii of curvature). It is valid only for
paraxial rays and only when the lens thickness is much less then
R1 and R2. The focal length f of a thin lens is the image distance
2. Focal length of a mirror (fM = R/2) depends only upon the
that corresponds to an object at infinity. So, putting u =  and
radius of curvature R while that of a lens [eq. (iv)] depends
v = f in the above equation, we have
on 1, 2, R1 and R2. Thus, if a lens and a mirror are immersed
in some liquid, the focal length of lens would change while
1  2  1 1 
   1    ...(iv) that of the mirror will remain unchanged.
f  1   R1 R 2  3. Suppose 2 < 1 in eq. (iv), i.e., refractive index of the
If the refractive index of the material of the lens is  and it is placed medium (in which lens is placed) is more than the refractive
in air, 2 =  and 1 = 1 so that eq. (iv) becomes  
index of the material of the lens, then  2  1 becomes a
1  1 1    
   1    ...(v)
f negative quantity, i.e., the lens changes its behaviour. A
 R1 R 2 
converging lens behaves as a diverging lens and vice-
This is called the lens maker’s formula because it can be used to versa. An air bubble in water seems as a convex lens but

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 22

behaves as a concave (diverging) lens. The shorter the focal length of a lens (or a mirror) the more it
converges or diverges light. As shown in the figure,
f1 < f2
and hence the power P1 > P2, as bending of light in case 1 is more
than that of case 2. For a lens,

1
P (in dioptre) = and for a mirror,,
f metre 
6.5 Magnification
The lateral, transverse of linear magnification m produced by a lens 1
is defined by, P (in dioptre) =
f metre 
height of image I
m  Following table gives the sign of P and f for different type of lens
height of object O
and mirror.
A real image II’ of an object OO’ formed by a convex lens is shown
in figure. 8. COMBINATION OF LENS
height of image II v (i) For a system of lenses, the net power, net focal length and
 
height of object OO u magnification given as follows :
P = P1 + P2 + P3 ............,

1 1 1 1
    ...........,
F f1 f 2 f 3

m = m1 × m2 × m3 × ............
(ii) When two lenses are placed co-axially at a distance d from
each other then equivalent focal length (F).

Substituting v and u with proper sign,

II I v I v
  or m
OO  O  u O u

v
Thus, m 
u

7. POWER OF AN OPTICAL INSTRUMENT

1 1 1 d
By optical power of an instrument (whether it is a lens, mirror or a   
refractive surface) we mean the ability of the instrument to deviate F f1 f 2 f1f 2 and P = P1 + P2 – dP1P2
the path of rays passing through it. If the instrument converges
the rays parallel to the principal axis its power is said positive and 9. CUTTING OF LENS
if it diverges the rays it is said a negative power.
(i) A symmetric lens is cut along optical axis in two equal
parts. Intensity of image formed by each part will be same
as that of complete lens.
(ii) A symmetric lens is cut along principle axis in two equal
parts. Intensity of image formed by each part will be less
compared as that of complete lens. (aperture of each part
is 1 / 2 times that of complete lens)

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 23

 A + MPN = 180° ...(i)

In triangle MNP, r1 + r2 + MPN = 180° ...(ii)
From eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
r1 + r2 = A ...(iii)

11.1 Deviation

Deviation  means angle between incident ray and emergent ray.

In reflection, = 180 – 2i = 180 – 2r
in refraction, = |i – r|

10. SILVERING OF LENS

On silvering the surface of the lens it behaves as a mirror. The
1 2 1
focal length of the silvered lens is   where
F f1 f m In prism a ray of light gets refracted twice one at M and
f1 = focal length of lens from which refraction takes place (twice) other at N. At M its deviation is i1 – r1 and at N it is i2 – r2.
These two deviations are added. So the net deviation is,
fm = focal length of mirror from which reflection takes place.
= (i1 – r1) + (i2 – r2) = (i1 + i2) – (r1 + r2) = (i1 + i2) – A
11. PRISM
Thus, = (i1 + i2) – A ...(iv)
A prism has two plane surfaces AB and AC inclined to each other
sin i1
as shown in figure. A is called the angle of prism or refracting (i) If A and i1 are small :   , therefore, r1 will also be
angle. sin r1
small. Hence, since sine of a small angle is nearly equal to
the angle is radians, we have, i1 = r1
Also, A = r1 + r2 and so if A and r1 are small r2 and i2 will
sin i 2
also be small. From   , we can say, i2 = r2
sin r2
Substituting these values in eq. (iv), we have
 = (r1 + r2) – A =  (r1 + r2) – A = A – A
or = ( – 1) A ...(v)
(ii) Minimum deviation : It is found that the angle of deviation
The importance of the prism really depends on the fact that the  varies with the angle of incidence i1 of the ray incident
angle of deviation suffered by light at the first refracting surface, on the first refracting face of the prism. The variation is
say AB (in 2-dimensional figure) is not cancelled out by the shown in figure and for one angle of incidence it has a
deviation at the second surface AC (as it is in a parallel glass minimum value  min. At this value the ray passes
slab), but is added to it. This is why it can be used in a spectrometer, symmetrically through the prism (a fact that can be proved
an instrument for analysing light into its component colours.
theoretically as well as be shown experimentally), i.e., the
General Formulae angle of emergence of the ray from the second face equals
In quadrilateral AMPN,  AMP + ANP = 180° the angle of incidence of the ray on the first face.

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 24

Now, if minimum value of r2 is greater than c then obviously all

values of r2 will be greater than c and TIR will take place under all
conditions. Thus, the condition of no emergence is, (r2)min > c or
A – c > c

c
or A ...(xii)
2

11.3 Dispersion and deviation of light by a prism

White light is a superposition of waves with wavelengths

extending throughout the visible spectrum. The speed of light in
vacuum is the same for all wavelengths, but the speed in a material
i2 = i1 = i ...(vi) substance is different for different wavelengths. Therefore, the
It therefore, follows that index of refraction of a material depends on wavelength. In most
r1 = r2 = r ...(vii) materials the value of refractive index  decreases with increasing
From eqs. (iii) and (vii) wavelength.

A
r
2
Further at,  = m = (i + i) – A

A  m
or i ...(viii)
2
sin i
  If a beam of white light, which contains all colours, is sent through
sin r
the prism, it is separated into a spectrum of colours. The spreading
of light into its colour components is called dispersion.
 A  m 
sin  
or   2  ...(ix) 11.4 Dispersive Power
A
sin
2 When a beam of white light is passed through a prism of
transparent material light of different wavelengths are deviated
11.2 Condition of no emergence by different amounts. If r, y and v are the deviations for red,
In this section we want to find the condition such that a ray of yellow and violet components then average deviation is measured
light entering the face AB does not come out of the face AC for by y as yellow light falls in between red and violet. v – r is
any value of angle i1, i.e., TIR takes place on AC called angular dispersion. The dispersive power of a material is
defined as the ratio of angular dispersion to the average deviation
r1 + r2 = A  r2 = A – r1
when a white beam of light is passed through it. It is denoted by
or (r2)min = A – (r1)max ...(x) . As we know
Now, r1 will be maximum when i1 is maximum and maximum = ( – 1) A
value of i1 can be 90°.

sin i1 max sin 90

Hence,   
sin r1 max sin r1 max

1
 sin r1 max   sin  c  (r1)max = c


 From eq. (x), (r2)min = A – c ...(xi)

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 25

This equation is valid when A and i are small. Suppose, a beam of

white light is passed through such a prism, the deviation of red,
yellow and violet light are
r = (r – 1) A, y = (y – 1) A and v = (v – 1) A
The angular dispersion is v – r = (v – r) A and the average deviation is
y = (y – 1) A. Thus, the dispersive power of the medium is,

v  r Coma can be reduced by carefully working out the curvature

 ...(i)
 y 1 function, or by blocking off the rays that create the ‘tail’ of the
comet shaped image.
12. MONOCHROMATIC ABERRATIONS  Astigmatism : The shape of the image is different at different
IN MIRRORS AND LENSES distances. Suppose a point object is placed off the optical
axis of a converging lens. Then, as a lateral screen is moved
(INDEPENDENT OFWAVELENGTH) along the axis, at one point, the image is almost a line. At
other positions of the screen, the image changes into an
Spherical aberration : Because of the fact that all rays are not
different shapes at different locations of the screen.
paraxial. The image of a point object formed by a spherical mirror
is a surface, whose 2-D view is called a ‘caustic curve’. When a Astigmatism can be reduced by using non-spherical
surfaces of revolution-such corrected lenses are called
real image is seen on a screen and the screen is moved forward/
‘anastigmatic’.
backward slightly, a disc image is formed which becomes smallest
at one position. The periphery of this smallest disc is called ‘the  Curvature : Consider a point object placed off the optical
circle of least confusion’. Lenses too exhibit spherical aberration. axis of a lens. We have seen that image is spread out laterally
as well as longitudionally, with individual defects in each
We can reduce it by blocking non-paraxial rays but this reduces
direction. However, the best image is obtained on a curved
the brightness of the image. A ring shaped black paper is affixed
surface and not on a plane screen. This phenomenon is
on the lens so that only those rays pass through the ‘hole’ in the called ‘curvature’.
ring, which are paraxial. Parabolic mirrors do not exhibit any
 Distortion : A square lateral object has images, which are
spherical aberration, hence all expensive reflecting telescopes use
either ‘barrel shaped’ or ‘curving in’ as shown. This is
parabolic mirrors.
because the lateral magnification itself depends on the actual
In lenses, spherical aberration can be reduced by using a distance of a portion of the object from the optical axis.
combination of convex and concave lenses, which cancel out These different magnifications of different portions produce
each other’s aberrations. this effect.

13. CHROMATIC ABERRATIONS IN LENSES

(DEPENDENT ON WAVELENGTH)
Coma : Consider a point object placed ‘off’ the optical axis. Most
These aberrations are absent in mirrors. In lenses, the focal length
of the rays focus at a single point, but others form images at
depends on the refractive index, which is different for different
different points so that the overall image is like that of a ‘comet’
colors. Hence, colored images are formed at different points if
( ) having a sharp ‘point’ image followed by a trail like that of a white light is emitted by the object. A proper combination of convex
comet. and concave lenses exactly cancel out each others chromatic

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 26

aberration (for light having two wavelengths only) so that the Magnifying power of a simple microscope is defined as the
final image is not split into colored images. Such a combination is ratio of the angles subtended by the image and the object
called an ‘achromatic doublet’. The distance along the optical on the eye, when both are at the least distance of distinct
axis between images of violet and red is called ‘axial or longitudional vision from the eye.
chromatic aberration’ = LCA (say):

For an incident parallel beam of white light, image distance = focal By definition, Magnifying power m ...(1)

length. From lens-makers formulae:
-df/f = dn/(n - 1) =  = dispersive power of lens  (nV – nR)/(n – 1) For small angles expessed in radians, tan   
 LCA = f  f. For two thin lenses in contact, (1/F) = (1/f1) +   tan  and   tan 

(1/f2). Therefore, dF = 0 1/f1 = –2/f2  achromatic lens. An
achromatic ‘doublet’ or lens combination can be made by placing tan 
two thin lenses in contact, with one converging and the other  m ...(2)
tan 
diverging, made of different materials.
For lateral objects, images of different colors have different sizes AB
as magnification itself depends on the focal length, which is In ABC, tan  
CB
different for different colors. The difference in the size of lateral
images of violet and red colors is called ‘lateral chromatic A1B' AB
aberration’. In A1B’C, tan   
CB' CB'
Putting in (2), we get

AB CB' CB'  v v
m     ...(3)
CB AB CB  u u
where, CB’ = – v, distance of image from the lens, CB = –u,
distance of object from the lens

1 1 1
From lens formula,  
v u f
Multiply both sides by v

v v
1 
u f
14. OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
v
14.1 Simple Microscope or Magnifying Glass using (3), 1  m 
f
A simple microscope is used for observing magnified images
of tiny objects. It consists of a converging lens of small v
or m  1
focal length. A virtual, erect and magnified image of the f
object is formed at the least distance of distinct vision from
the eye held close to the lens. That is why the simple  d
But v = – d,  m  1  
microscope is also called a magnifying glass.  f

14.2 Compound Microscope

A compound microscope is an optical instrument used for

observing highly magnified images of tiny objects.
Construction : A compound microscope consists of two
converging lenses (or lens system); an objective lens O of
very small focal length and short aperture and an eye piece
E of moderate focal length and large aperture.

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 27

where d is C2B’’ = least distance of distinct vision, fe is focal

length of eye lens. And

A ' B' distance of image A' B' from C1

m0  
AB distance of object AB from C1

C1B' v
  0
C1B  u 0

Putting these values in (3), we get

v0  d  v  d 
m 1   0 1   ...(4)
 u0  f  |u 
|  fe 
 e  0 

Magnifying power of a compound microscope is defined as As the object AB lies very close to F0, the focus of objective
the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by the final lens, therefore,
image to the angle subtended at the eye by the object, when u0 = C1B  C1F0 = f0 = focal length of objective lens.
both the final image and the object are situated at the least
As A’B’ is formed very close to eye lens whose focal length
distance of distinct vision from the eye.
is also short, therefore,
In figure, C2B’’ = d. Imagine the object AB to be shifted to
v0 = C1B’  C1C2 = L = length of microscope tube.
A1B’’ so that it is at a distance d from the eye. If A’’ C2 B’’
=  and A1C2B’’ = , then by definition, Putting in (4), we get

 L  d  L  d 
m 1    
Magnifying power, m 

...(1)
 f0  f  | f | 1  f  ...(5)
 e  0  e 
For small angles expressed in radians, tan  14.3 Astronomical Telescope
  tan  and  tan  An astronomical telescope is an optical instrument which is
used for observing distinct image of heavenly bodies like
tan 
From (1), m  ...(2) stars, planets etc.
tan 
It consists of two lenses (or lens systems), the objective
A ' ' B' ' lens, which is of large focal length and large aperture and
In A’’B’’C2, tan  
C 2 B' ' the eye lens, which has a small focal length and small
aperture. The two lenses are mounted co-axially at the free
A1B AB ends of the two tubes.
In A1B’’C2, tan   
C 2 B C 2 B
Putting in (2), we get

A B C 2 B AB A B A' B'

m    
C 2 B AB AB A ' B' AB
m = me × m0

A B
where m e  , magnification produced by eye lens,
A ' B'

A ' B' However, in astronomical telescope, final image being

and m 0  , magnification produced by objective lens. inverted with respect to the object does not matter, as the
AB
astronomical objects are usually spherical.
 d  Magnifying Power of an astronomical telescope in normal
Now, m e  1  f 
 adjustment is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended at
 e 

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 28

the eye by the final image to the angle subtended at the eye,  A’C1B’ = 
by the object directly, when the final image and the object Further, let A’’C2B’’ = , where C2B’’ = d
both lie at infinite distance from the eye.

 By definition, Magnifying power, m  ...(4)
 
Magnifying power, m  ...(1)
 As angles  and  are small, therefore,  tan  and  tan 
As angles  and  are small, therefore,  tan  and  tan 
 tan . From (4), m  ...(5)
tan 
tan  A ' B'
From (1), m  ...(2) In A’B’C2, tan  
tan  C 2 B'
A ' B'
In A’B’C2, tan   A ' B'
C 2 B' In A’B’C1, tan  
C1B'
A 'B '
In A’B’C1, tan   A' B' C1B'
C1B ' Putting in (5), we get m 
C 2 B' A ' B'
A ' B' C1B' C1B'
Put in (2), m    C1B' f
C 2 B' A' B' C 2 B' m  0 ...(6)
C 2 B'  u e
f0 where C1B’ = f0 = focal length of objective lens
or m ...(3)
 fe C2B’ = – ue, distance of A’B’, acting as the object for
eye lens.
where C1B’ = f0 = focal length of objective lens.
C2B’ = –fe = focal length of eye lens. 1 1 1
Now, for eye lens,  
v u f
Negative sign of m indicates that final image is inverted.
Taking ve = –d, u = –ue and f = + fe, we get
Memory Note
(i) In normal adjustment of telescope, distance between the 1 1 1
 
objective lens and eye lens = (f0 + fe).  d  ue fe
(ii) Angular magnification produced by the telescope = .
1 1 1 1 f 
Clearly, visual angle  is much larger as compared to .    1  e 
u e fe d fe  d
Figure shows the course of rays in an astronomical
telescope, when the final image is formed at the least distance f0  fe 
of distinct vision (d) from the eye Putting in (6), we get m   1  
fe  d
Discussion :
(i) As magnifying power is negative, the final image in an
astronomial telescope is inverted i.e. upside down and left
turned right.
(ii) As intermediate image is between the two lenses, cross wire
(or measuring device) can be used.
(iii) In normal setting of telescope, final image is at inifiny.
magnifying power is minimum.
Magnifying power of an astronomical telescope is defined When final image is at least distance of distinct vision,
as the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by the final magnifying power is maximum. Thus
image at the least distance of distinct vision to the angle
subtended at the eye by the object at infinity, when seen  f0  f  f 
directly. (M.P.)min. = –  ; (M.P.)max. = – 0 1  e 
f
 e fe  d

SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 29

SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
Calculate the distance of an object of height ‘h’ from a
concave mirror or focal length 10 cm, so as to obtain a real
image of magnification 2.

Sol. Given focal length f = – 10 cm, u = ?

v
magnification m    2  v = 2 u
u 1 1 1
   (for a lens)
f v u
1 1 1
From mirror formula   , we have
f v u 1 1 40  15
  
15 40 40  15
1 2 1 3 1
    
10 2u u 2u 10 40  15 120
f   11 cm
55 11
10  3
 u  15 cm Example - 3
2
The radii of curvature of the faces of a double convex lens
This is, distance of the object from the mirror is 15 cm in
are 10 cm and 15 cm. If the focal length of the lens is 12 cm,
front of mirror.
find the refractive index of the material of the lens.
Example - 2
A lens forms a real image of an object. The distance from Sol. Given R1 = 10 cm, R2 = – 15 cm, f = 12 cm
the object to the lens is u cm and the distance of the image Lens Maker’s formula is
from the lens is v cm. The given graphs shows variation of
v with u. 1  1 1 
 n  1  
(i) What is the nature of the lens ? f  R1 R 2 
(ii) Using the graph, find the focal length of this lens.
1  1 1 1 5
  n  1     n  1
12  10 15  12 30

30 1
 n 1   0 .5
5 12
 Refractive index, n = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5

Example - 4
A double convex lens of glass of refractive index 1.6 has its
both surfaces of equal radii of curvature of 30 cm each. An
object of height 5 cm is placed at a distance of 12.5 cm from
the lens. Calculate the size of the image formed.

Sol. Given n = 1.6, R1 = + 30 cm, R2 = – 30 cm, O = 5 cm,

Sol. (i) The lens is convex because image formed by the lens is
u = –12.5 cm
real.
(ii) Focal length : From graph when u = – 40 cm, v = 15 cm. 1  1 1 
Focal length (f) of lens :  n  1  
f  R1 R 2 
RAY OPTICS 30

Sol. The formation of image is shown in figure.

 1 1   2 
 1.6  1    0.6   
 30 30   30 

30
 f = 25 cm
0.6  2

1 1 1
From this lens formula  
f v u

1 1 1 1 1 1 2
     
v f u 25 12.5 25
Object O is at the right, so we are using the first focus of
 v = – 25 cm convex lens, therefore, for the lens f = – 10 cm,
I v v = – 15 cm.
Magnification m  
O u From lens formula,

Size of image, I 
v
O 
 25  5 = 10 cm 1 1 1
  
u  12.5 f v u
Example - 5
1 1 1 1 1 2  3
A converging lens of refractive index 1.5 and of focal length      
u v f 15 10 30
15 cm in air, has the same radii of curvature for both sides.
If it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.7, find the  u = 30 cm
focal length of the lens in the liquid. The image of O at O’ by the mirror and lens is formed only if
O is at the centre of curvature of lens i.e., OC = R (radius of
Sol. Given fa = 15 cm ng = 1.5, nl = 1.7 curvature).
Focal length of lens in liquid, From Fig. | u | + | R | = 50 cm
ng 1 1.5  1  | R | = 50 – | u | = 50 – 30 = 20 cm
f   fa   15 cm
ng 1.5
1  1 Example - 7
n 1.7
A convex lens made up of glass of refractive index 1.5 is
0.5  1.7 dipped, in turn, in :
 × 15 cm = – 63.75 cm
1.5  1.7 (i) medium A of refractive index 1.65
(ii) medium B of refractive index 1.33
Example - 6
Explain, giving reasons, whether it will behave as a
In the accompanying diagram, the direct image is formed
converging lens or a diverging lens in each of these two
by the lens (f = 10 cm) of an object placed at O and that
media.
formed after reflection from the spherical mirror are formed
at the same point O’. What is the radius of curvature of the Sol. If fa is focal length of lens (refractive index ng) in air, then its
mirror ? focal length (fe) in a liquid of refractive index (nl) is given by

n g 1
f   fa (Given ng = 1.5)
ng
1
n
(i) For medium A, nl = 1.65

1.5  1 0.5  1.65

 fe   fa  f  5.5 f a
1.5
1 1.5  1.65 a
1.65
RAY OPTICS 31

Negative sign shows that the action of converging lens in 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

air is diverging when immersed in medium A.    gives    
f v u v f u 20 12
(ii) For medium B, nl = 1.33
35
1 .5  1 0.5  1.33 
 f   fa   fa 60
1 .5 1.5  1.33
1
1.33 60
 v  7.5 cm
8
0.5  1.33
  f a  3.91 f a This implies that image is formed to the right of the lens and
0.17
is real.
Positive sign shows that lens remains converging.
(b) In this case u = + 12 cm, f = – 16 cm,
Example - 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A converging lens has a focal length of 20 cm in air. It is    give     
made of material of refractive index 1.5. If it is immersed in f v u v f u 16 12
water of refractive index 4/3, what will be the new focal
3  4
length ? 
48
4 v = 48 cm
Sol. Given fa = 20 cm, ng = 1.5, nl =
3 Example - 10
An illuminated object and a screen are placed 90 cm apart.
f 
n g 1
 fa 
1.5  1  20 cm  0.5  4 Determine the focal length and nature of the lens required
× 20 cm
ng  1.5  0.5 to produce a clear image on the screen, twice the size of
1   1
n  4/3  the object.

= 80 cm Sol. Given u + v = 90 cm ...(1)

Example - 9
A beam of light converges to a point P. A lens is placed in
the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P. At what point
does the beam converge if the lens is (a) convex lens of focal
length 20 cm, (b) a concave lens of focal length 16 cm.

I v
 gives
O u

|v|
2
|u|

or | v | = 2 | u | (numerically) ...(2)
Sol. (a) Point P acts as a virtual object for convex lens.
From (1) and (2)
Given u = + 12 cm, f = + 20 cm
| u | = 30 cm, | v | = 60 cm
By sign convention u = – 30 cm, v = 60 cm

1 1 1
  gives
f v u

1 1 1 2
  
60 30 60
 f = 20 cm (convex lens)
RAY OPTICS 32

Example - 11 1 1 1 1 1 1
    
Two lenses of power 10 D and –5 D are placed in contact. v u f 9 10 90
(i) Calculate the power of lens combination.  v = – 90 cm
(ii) Where should an object be held from the lens, so as to
v 90 cm
obtain a virtual image of magnification 2 ? Linear magnification M =   10
u  9 cm
Sol. (i) Given P1 = 10 D, P2 = – 5 D
2
Power of Combination, P = P1 + P2 = 10 D – 5 D = 5 D A image v
Areal magnification M A      100
A object u
1 1
(ii) Focal length F   m = 0.20 m = 20 cm (Convergent lens) 2 2
P 5  Area of image, Aimage = 100 × Aobject = 100 × 1 mm = 100 mm
(c) Angular magnification of convex lens is
Magnification m  u  2  v = 2u
v
From lens formula (u is negative) D 25 cm 
M   2.8
u 9 cm 
1 1 1
 
F v u where u is numerical value of object distance and D =
minimum distance of distinct vision = 25 cm.
1 1 1 1 1
   –   u = – 10 cm Example - 13
20  2u u 2u 20
(a) An equiconvex lens with radii of curvature of magnitude r
Example - 12
each, is put over a liquid layer poured on top of a plane
2
A figuredivided into squares, each of side 1 mm , is being mirror. A small needle, with its tip on the principal axis of
viewed at a distance of 9 cm through a magnifying lens of the lens, is moved along the axis until its inverted real
focal length 10 cm, held close to the eye. image coincides with the needle itself. The distance of the
(a) Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of the image. needle from the lens is measured to be ‘a’. On removing
the liquid layer and repeating the experiment the distance
(b) What is the magnification produced by the lens ? How
much is the area of each square in the virtual image ? is found to be ‘b’.

(c) What is the angular magnification of the lens ?

Sol. (a) The ray diagram showing the formation of image by

magnifying lens is shown in figure.

Given that two value of distance measured represent the

focal length values in the two cases, obtain a formula for
the refractive index of the liquid.
(b) If r = 10 cm, a = 15 cm, b = 10 cm, find the refractive index of
the liquid.

Sol. The focal length (f1) of lens is given by

1  1 1  2n  1
 n  1   
f1 r r r
(b) Given f = + 10 cm, u = – 9 cm
Given f1 = b
1 1 1 1 2 n  1 r
From lens formula   , we have 
f v u   b
b r 2 n  1
RAY OPTICS 33

The focal length of liquid lens (plano concave lens) is Example - 15

A compound microscope with an objective of 1.0 cm focal
  n   1      n   1  f 2 
1  1 1 r
f2 n   1 length and an eye-piece of 2.0 cm focal length has a tube
 r  r
length of 20 cm. Calculate the magnifying power of the
As glass lens and liquid lens are in contact microscope, if the final image is formed at the near point of
the eye.
1 1 1 1 n   1
    
f f1 f 2 b r Sol. Magnifying power of compound microscope for final image
at near point of eye.
Given f = a
L  D
1 1 n  1 M 1  
   f0  fe 
a b r
20  25 
n  1 1 1
 
 1    20 1  12.5 
1.0  2.0 
r b a
= – 20 × 13.5 = – 270
1 1 Negative sign shows that the final image is inverted.
n   1  r  
b a Example - 16
Refractive index of liquid, A ray of light passing through an equilateral triangular
prism from air undergoes minimum deviation when angle
r r
n  1   3
b a of incidence is th of the angle of prism. Calculate the
4
10 10 2 4 speed of light in the prism.
(b) n  1   1  1   = 1.33
10 15 3 3
3 3
Example - 14 Sol. Given A = 60°, i  A   60  45
4 4
A converging lens of focal length 6.25 cm is used as a
magnifying glass. If the near point of the observer is 25 cm A
For minimum deviation i1 = i2 = i and r1 = r2 =  30
from the eye and lens is held close to eye, calculate (i) the 2
distance of the object from the lens (ii) angular sin i
magnification (iii) angular magnification when final image  Refractive index of prism, n 
sin r
is formed at infinity.
sin 45 1 / 2
Sol. Given f = 6.25 cm, v = – 25 cm, u = ?    2 = 1.41
sin 30 1/ 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
(i)      c 3  108 8 –1
f v u u v f Speed of light in prism, v   = 2.13 × 10 ms
n 1.41
fv 6.25   25  6.25  25 Example - 17
 u   = –5 cm
f  v 6.25   25 31.25 In a compound microscope, an object is placed at a distance
(ii) Angular magnification when final image is at the distance of of 1.5 cm from the objective of focal length 1.25 cm. If the
distinct vision eye piece has a focal length of 5 cm and the final image is
formed at the near point, estimate the magnifying power of
D 25 the microscope.
M  1  1 5
f 6.25
Sol. Magnifying power of microscope,
(iii) Angular magnification when final image is formed at infinity
v0  D 
D 25 M 1  
M  4 u 0  fe 
f 6.25
RAY OPTICS 34

Given u0 = – 1.5 cm, f0 = 1.25 cm, fe = 5 cm, D = 25 cm i2 = 90°

1 1 1
Formula   gives
f 0 v0 u 0

1 1 1 1 1 1
   
1.25 v 0 2.5  v 0 1.25 1.5

 v0 = 7.5 cm

7.5  25 
M 1   = – 5 × 6 = – 30
1.5  5 
For snell’s law
Example - 18
An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of power 10 D sin i 2 sin 90 1
  
and 1 D. What is its magnifying power in normal adjustment? sin r2 sin  sin 

Sol. Magnifying power of astronomical telescope in normal 1

adjustment    1.6
0.625
f0 P
M   e [with f0 > fe or P0 < Pe] b
fe P0 Given   1.2 
2
Given P0 = 1 D, Pe = 10 D Putting  = 1.6 and  = 400 nm = 4 × 10 m
–7

10 b
 M  10 1.6  1.2 
1 (4  10  7 ) 2
Example - 19 –7 2 2 –14 2
 b = (4 × 10 ) × 0.4 m = 6.4 × 10 m
A beam of light of wavelength 400 nm is incident normally –7
on a right angled prism as shown. It is observed that the Now putting  = 5000 Å = 5 × 10 m, we get
light just grazes along the surface AC after falling on it.
Given that the refractive index of the material of the prism 6.4  10 14
'  1.2  = 1.2 + 0.256 = 1.456
varies with the wavelength  as per the relation 5 10 7 2

2
A, = 1.2 + b/ Example - 20
An object is placed in front of a right angled prism ABC in
two positions (a) and (b) as shown. The prism is made of
crown glass with critical angle 41°. Trace the path of two
rays P and Q (i) in (a) normal to the hypotenuse and (ii) in
(b) parallel to the hypotenuse.

Calculate the value of b and the refractive index of the prism

material for a wavelength  = 5000 Å
–1
[(Given q = sin (0.625)]
–9
Sol. Given  = 400 nm = 400 × 10 m
i1 = 0, r1 = 0
r1 + r2 =   r2 =  – r1 = 
RAY OPTICS 35

Sol.
 
f  a n g 1  1.5  1 
 i.e. f   15  
f g  n g 1  1.5 
 1 
 1.7 

 0 .5 
i.e. f   15   1.7  = – 15 × 4.25 = – 63.75 cm
  0 . 2 
Example - 23
An object is placed at a distance of 40 cm from a concave
Example - 21 mirror of focal length 15 cm. If the object is displaced
Calculate the distance of an object of height h from a through a distance of 20 cm toward the mirror, by how
concave mirror of focal length 10 cm, so as to obtain a real much distance is the image displaced ?
image of magnification.
1 1 1
v v Sol. Using,  
Sol. For real image,  m  i.e.  2  i.e. 2u + v f u v
u u
uf
1 1 1 u
using   we get uf
v u f
For a concave mirror,
1 1 1 2  1 1 f = – 15 cm and u = – 40 cm
  i.e. 
2u u  10 2u 10
v
 40 15  40 15
3 1
  40   15 25 = – 24 cm
i.e.  i.e. u = – 15 cm
2u 10 On displacement of object towards the mirror,
Example - 22 u’ = – (40 – 20) = – 20 cm
Draw a plot showing the variation of power of a lens, with
the wavelength of the incident light. A converging lens of v' 
 20 15   20 15
= – 60 cm
refractive index 1.5 and of focal length 15 cm in air, has the
 20   15 5
same radii of curvature for both sides. If it is immersed in a  movement of image
liquid of refractive index 1.7, find the focal length of the
lens in the liquid. = (–60) – (–24) = 36 cm.

Example - 24
Sol. a n g  1.5
A glass slab is immersed in water. Find the critical angle at
a a
a ng 1 .5 glass water interfaces, given g = 1.5 and w = 1.33.
Lng  
a nL 1.7
w 1.5
g   1.13
Sol. 1.33
P
1
Using, sin C  

0 1
sin C  or C = 62°
1.13
1
Using  (n – 1) we get
f
RAY OPTICS 36

Example - 25 1 1 1
 
An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of radius f u v
of curvature 40 cm at a distance of 10 cm. Find the position,
nature and magnification of the image. 1 1 1 1 1 3  2
    
v f u 18 27 54

Sol. Using, 1  1  1 and f  R v = – 54 cm.

v f u 2
That is, image is formed in front at mirror at a distance 54 cm
from the mirror. Therefore the screen must be placed at a
we get
1 2 1  1 1 1
      distance 54 cm from the mirror. Size of the image
v R u  40  10  20 10

I
v
O  
 54
1 10  20 10 1 × 2.5 cm. = – 5 cm.
   u  27
or or v = 20 cm.
v 200 200 20
The image is real, inverted and 5 cm. long. If the candle is
Image is formed behind the mirror Magnification, moved closer, the screen should have to be moved farther
and farther. If the candle is brought less than 18 cm, the
v 20 image will be virtual and cannot be collected on the
m  2
u  10 screen.
Image is virtual , erect and enlarged.
Example - 28
Example - 26
A beaker is filled with water to a height of 12.5 m. The
A reflecting type telescope has a concave reflector of radius apparent depth of the needle lying at the bottom of the
of curvature 120 cm. Calculate the focal length of eye piece tank as measured by a microscope is 9.4 cm. What is the
to secure a magnification of 20. refractive index of water ? If water is replaced by a liquid
of refractive index 1.63 upto the same height, by what
f0 R
Sol. Using, M  f and f 0  2 distance would the microscope be moved to focus on the
e
needle again ?

R 120 60 Re al depth (H )

i.e. M   
2 fe 2 fe fe Sol. Refractive index, n =
Apparent depth h 

60 Given H = 12.5 cm, h = 9.4 cm

or fe 
M
12.5
 Refractive index of water, n w   1.33
60 9 .4
Here M = – 20  f e   3 cm.
 20 Refractive index of liquid, nl = 1.63
Example - 27
H 12.5
A small candle 2.5 cm in size is placed 27 cm in front of a  Apparent height with liquid in tank, h  
n  1.63
concave mirror of radius of curvature 36 cm. At what
distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order = 7.7 cm
to receive a sharp image ? Describe the nature and size of  Displacement of microscope, x = 9.4 – 7.7 = 1.7 cm
the image. If the candle is moved closer to the mirror, how
should the screen be moved ? Example - 29
Figure (a) and (b) show refraction of an incident ray in air
Sol. Given u = – 27 cm, O = 2.5 cm. at 60° with the normal to a glass-air and water-air interface,
respectively, Predict the angle (r) of refraction of an incident
36
| r | = | 2f | = 36 cm.  f    18 cm. ray in water at 45° with the normal to a water-glass interface
2 [figure (c)]
(with sign convention)
RAY OPTICS 37

Sol. The light rays starting from bulb can pass through the
surface if angle of incidence at surface is less than or equal
to critical angle (C) for water-air interface. If h is depth of
bulb from the surface, the light will emerge only through a
circle of radius r given by
r = h tan C

where h = 80 cm = 0.80 m

1 3
But sin C  
n
a w 4

Sol. Snell’s law of refraction is sin i  n 2  1n 2 3

sin r n 1  tan C 
7

sin 60 n g 3
Figure (a)  = n
sin 35 n a a g  r = 0.80 ×
7
 Refraction index of glass with respect to air,  Area of circular surface of water,

sin 60 0.8660 

2
ng    1.51 2 3 
a
sin 35 0.5736 A = r = 3.14 ×  0.8  
 7

sin 60 n w
Figure (b) sin 41  n  a n w 9 2
a
= 3.14 × 0.64× = 2.6 m
7
Refractive index of water with respect to air, Example - 31
sin 60 0.8660 Double convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass
  1.32 of refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the same radius
sin 41 0.6561
of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required if
the focal length is to be 20 cm ?
sin 45 a n g
Figure (c) 
sin r a nw Sol. Lens maker’s formula is

nw 1.32 1  1 1 
 sin r  a
 sin 45  × 0.7071 = 0.6181  n  1  
n
a g 1.51 f R
 1 R 2 

–1
 r = sin (0.6181) = 38° If R is radius of curvature of double convex lens, then
Example - 30 R1 = + R, R2 = – R
A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containing
1 1 1 1 2 n  1
water to a depth of 80 cm. What is the area of the surface of   n  1   or 
water through which light from the bulb can emerge out ? f R R f R
Refractive index of water is 4/3. R = 2 (n – 1) f

RAY OPTICS 38

Here n = 1.55, f = + 20 cm.

A  m
 R = 2 (1. 55 – 1) × 20 = 22 cm sin
n 2
Example - 32 A
sin
What is the focal length of a combination of a convex lens 2
of focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of focal length
Given angle of prism A = 60°.
20 cm in contact ? Is the system a converging or a diverging
lens ? Ignore thickness of lenses. Minimum angle of deviation m = 40°

Sol. Given f1 = + 30 cm, f2 = – 20 cm A  m

sin
The focal length (F) of combination of given by 2
Refractive index n =
A
sin
 F  f1f 2  30   20   60 cm
1 1 1 2
 
F f1 f 2 f1  f 2 30  20

That is, the focal length of combination is 60 cm and it acts  60  40 

sin  
like a diverging lens.
  2   sin 50  0.7660
= 1.532
Example - 33  60  sin 30 0.5
sin  
The image of a small electric bulb fixed on the wall of a  2 
room is to be obtained on the opposite wall 3 m away by
When prism is placed in water, its refractive index becomes
means by a large convex lens. What is the maximum
possible focal length of the lens required for the purpose ? ng 1.532
w ng    1.152
Sol. For a fixed distance D between object and image for its real nw 1.33
image If m’ is the new angle of deviation, then

D2  x 2
f   A  m '   60   m ' 
4D sin   sin  
 2   2 
w ng  
where x is the separation between two position of lens. sin A / 2 sin 30
For maximum f, x = 0
 60   m ' 
D sin  
 f max    2 
4 1.152 
0 .5
Given D = 3 m
60   m '
3  sin = 1.152 × 0.5 = 0.576
 f m  0.75 m 2
4
Example - 34 60   m '
= 35° or 1m = 10°
A prism is made of glass of unknown refractive index. A 2
parallel beam of light is incident on a face of the prism. By Example - 35
rotating the prism, the minimum angle of deviation is At what angle should a ray of light be incident on the face
measured to be 40°. What is the refractive index of the of a prism of refracting angle 60° so that it just suffers
prism ? If the prism is placed in water (refractive index total internal reflection at the other face ? The refractive
1.33), predict the new minimum angle of deviation of a index of prism is 1.524.
parallel beam of light. The refracting angle of prism is 60°
(use. sin 50° = 0.7660 and sin 35° = 0.576) Sol. For just total internal reflection from prism, the ray must be
incident at critical angle on the second face.
ng
Given angle of prism, A = 60°, n = 1.524
Sol. Refractive index of prism material and w n g 
nw
RAY OPTICS 39

For farthest distance v = ;

1 1 1 1 1
   
u max v f  5

 umax = –5 cm
Thus the nearest distance is 4.2 cm and the farthest distance
is 5 cm (focal length of lens) for reading a book.

D
(b) Angular magnification M  , D = – 25 cm
u
If C is the critical angle for total internal reflection, then
Maximum angular magnification,
1 1
sin C    0.6561  25   25  6
n 1.524 M max 
–1
u max  25 / 6
C = sin (0.6561) = 41°
Let i be the angle of incident at first face of prism AB. The Minimum angular magnification,
ray follows the path PQRS
M min 
 25   25
 5
For just total internal reflection at the other face AC u max  5
r2 + C = 41°
Example - 37
As r1 + r2 = A
A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of
 r1 + A – r2 = 60° – 41° = 19°
focal length 2.0 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.25 cm
separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far from the objective
sin i
From Snell’s law n  should an object be placed in order to obtain the final
sin r
image at (i) the least distance of distinct vision (D = 25 cm)
 sin i = n sin r = 1.524 sin 19° = 1.524 × 0.3256 = 0.4962 and (ii) infinity.
–1
Angle of incidence i = sin (0.4962) = 29° 45’. What is the magnifying power of the microscope in each
case ?
Example - 36
A man with normal near point (25 cm) reads a book with Sol. Given f0 = 2.0 cm, fe = 6.25 cm, L = 15 cm, u0 = ?
small print using a magnifying glass : a thin convex lens of (i) When final image is formed at least distance of distinct vision
focal length 5 cm. (D = 25 cm) :
(a) What is the closest and the farthest distance at which he For eye lens : Here ve = – 25 cm
should keep the lens from the page, so that he can read the
book when viewing through the magnifying glass ? 1 1 1
  
(b) What is the maximum and the minimum angular fe ve u e
magnification (magnifying power) possible using the above
simple microscope ? 1 1 1 1 1 1  4
     
u e ve fe 25 6.25 25
Sol. (a) Given f = + 5 cm.
or ue = – 5 cm
For closest distance v = – 25 cm (normal near point)
As L = | v0 | + | ue |  | v0 | = L – | ue | = 15 – 5 = 10 cm
1 1 1
 From lens formula   For objective lens :
f v u
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1  5  
      f 0 v0 u 0
u min v f 25 5 25
1 1 1 1 1 2
25      
 u min    4.2 cm u 0 v 0 f 0 10 2 5
6
RAY OPTICS 40

5 1 1 1 1 1 1
u0    2.5 cm       v0 = 72 mm
2 v0 f0 u 0 8 9 72
That is distance of object from objective is 2.5 cm. For eye-lens if final image is formed at least distance of
distinct vision, then
v0  D
Magnification, M  1   ve = – D = – 25 cm = – 250 mm
u0  f 
 e 

1 1 1
  
10  25  fe ve u e
 1    4  5  20
2.5  6.25 
1 1 1 1 1 11
(ii) When final image is formed at infinity :     
u e ve fe 250 25 250
In this case L = v0 + fe
 v0 = L – fe = 15 – 6.25 = 8.75 cm 250
ue   mm  22.7 mm
For objective lens : 11
Separation between lenses, L = | v0 | + | ue | = 72 mm + 22.7mm
1 1 1
  = 94.7 mm = 9.47 cm
f 0 v0 u 0

v0  D
1 1 1 1 1 2  8.75 Magnifying power, M   1  
     u0  f 
 u 0 v 0 f 0 8.75 2 2  8.75  e 

2  8.75 72  25 cm 
 1  
u0  
6.75 9  2.5 cm  = – 8 (1 + 10) = – 88

 u0 = – 2.59 cm, | u0 | = 2.59 cm Example - 39

An angular magnification of 30 X is desired using an
v0 D
Magnification, M   . objective of focal length 1.25 cm and an eye-piece of focal
u 0 fe
length 5 cm. How would you set up the compound
microscope ?
8.75  25 
 .   13.5
2.59  6.25  Sol. In normal adjustment of microscope, the image is formed at
the least distance of distinct vision D = 25 cm.
Example - 38
A person with a normal near point (25 cm) using a compound D 25
Angular magnification of eye piece me = 1 +  1 6
microscope with an objective of focal length 8.0 mm and f 6
an eye-piece of focal length 2.5 cm can bring an object
Given total angular magnification M (= m0 × me) = 30
placed 9.0 mm from the objective in sharp focus. What is
the separation between the two lenses ? What is the M 30
magnifying power of the microscope ?  Magnification of objective, m 0   5
me 6

Sol. Given focal length of objective, f0 = 8 mm = 0.8 cm The objective lens of microscope forms real image, so its
Focal length of eye-piece, fe = 2.5 cm = 25 mm magnification is negative.

For objective lens : v0

  5  v0 = – 5u0
Distance of object from objective, u0 = – 9 mm u0

1 1 1 As u0 is negative and v0 is positive.

From lens formula   , we get
f 0 v0 u 0 u0 = – | u0 |, v0 = + 5 | u0 |
RAY OPTICS 41

Focal length of objective lens, f0 = 1.25 cm B

Sol. Refractive index n = A + , where  is the wavelength
1 1 1 2
 From lens formula  
f 0 v0 u 0
Power of a lens P 
1
f

 n g 1  R1 
1
R2


1 1 1 6  1 
   
1.25 5 | u 0 | | u 0 | 5| u 0 | Clearly, power of a lens  (ng – 1). This implies that the
power of a lens decreases with increase of wavelength
6
 | u 0 |  1.25 cm  1.5 cm  1 
5  P  2 nearly  . The plot is shown in figure.
  
Also | v0 | = 5 | u0 | = 5 × 1.5 = 7.5 cm
Focal length of eye lens, fe = 5 cm

1 1 1
Again from lens formula   P
fe ve u e

1 1 1 1 1 6
     
u e ve fe 25 5 25
Example - 42
25 A concave mirror and a convex lens are held in water. What
ue   cm = – 4.17 cm changes, if any, do you expect in their respective focal
6
lengths as compared to their values in air.
| ue | = 4.17 cm
Separation between the lenses d = | v0 | + | ue | Sol. A concave mirror forms the image involving reflection. Its
focal length depends only on radius of curvature, and hence
= 7.5 + 4.17 = 11.67 cm
remains the same even when it is held in water.
Thus to obtain, the desired magnification the separation
A convex lens forms the image involving refraction. Its focal
between the lenses must be 11.67 cm and the objective must
length depends on radii of curvature and refractive index of
be placed at a distance 1.5 cm in front of the objective lens.
lens material with respect to surrounding material. Hence
Example - 40 the focal length in water would become larger than that in
(a) The refractive index of glass is 1.5. What is the speed of air.
8 –1
light in glass ? (Speed of light in vacuum is 3.0 ×10 ms ).
(b) Is the speed of light in glass independent of the colour
of light ? If not, which of the two colours, red and violet,
travels slower in the glass prism ?

c 3  108
Sol. (a) Speed of light in glass, v    2  108 m / s
ng 1.5

(b) No, the speed of light in glass depends on the colour of

light.

1
v As nV > nR  vV < vR
n
That is, violet colour travels slower in glass prism.
Example - 41
Draw a plot showing the variation of power of a lens with
the wavelength of the incident light.
RAY OPTICS 42

Example - 43 (i) When wavelength of illuninating radiations decreases, the

resolving limit decreases, so resolving power increases.
A double convex lens, made from a material of refractive
index 1, is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 2 where (ii) When diameter of objective lens decreases,  and hence sin
2 > 1. What change, if any, would occur in the nature of  decreases; so resolving limit increases and hence resolving
the lens ? power decreases.
Example - 46
Sol. Focal of lens (refractive index 1) in a liquid of refractive
Define the term ‘resolving power’ of an astronomical
index 2 is
telescope. How does it get affected on
1  1 (i) increasing the aperture of the objective lens ?
f   fa
1 (ii) increasing the wavelength of light used ?
1
2
(iii) increasing the focal length of the objective lens ?
1 Justify your answer in each case.
Given 2 > 1, i.e., 1
2
Sol. Resolving Power of an Astronomical Telescope
1  1 The resolving power of an astronomical telescope is its
so f   f
 a ability to form separate images of two neighbouring
1 1
2 astronomical objects (e.g. stars).
The least distance between two neighbouring objects for
So the focal length of lens in liquid will be of opposite sign
which astronomical telescope can form separate images is
of the focal length of lens in air, i.e., nature of lens will change.
called the resolving limit. The angular limit of resolution is
Hence, lens would now behave like a diverging (concave)
given by
lens.
Example - 44 1.22 
 min 
Give reasons for the following : d
The value of the Brewster angle for a transparent medium where  is wavelength and d is diameter of aperture objective
is different for light of different colours. lens. Smaller the resolving limit, greater is the resolving
–1
power.
Sol. Breswter’s angle, ip = tan (n)
d
1  Resolving power 
As refractive index n   2  ; is different for lights of 1.22 
  
(i) RP  d, so by increasing aperture of objective lens, the
different wavelengths (colours), therefore, Brewster’s angle
resolving power of telescope increases.
is different for lights of different colours.
Example - 45 1
(ii) RP  , so by increasing the wavelength of light, the
How is the resolving power of a microscope affected when, 

(i) the wavelength of illuminating radiations is decreased ? resolving power of telescope decreases.

(ii) the diameter of the objective lens is decreased ? (iii) Resolving power of telescope is independent of its focal
length, so there is no effect on resolving power of focal
Justify your answer.
length of objective lens is increased.

 Example - 47
Sol. Resolving limit of microscope 
2n sin  Is dispersion possible in a hollow prism ? Also give reason.

where  is the wavelength, n is the refractive index and  is Sol. No, because both the faces AB and AC of prism behave like
the semiangle of cone of rays entering the microscope, glass plates. Any ray of white light (say PQ), after refraction
through the faces AB and AC emerges along RS parallel to
1
Resolving power  the incident ray.
Re solving limit
RAY OPTICS 43

A
Example - 50
S
Q A crack in a window pane appears silvery, why ?
R
P Sol. When there is a crack in a window pane, then there is air in
B C space of crack. When light enters the cracked window pane,
it goes from glass to air at an angle greater than the critical
Example - 48
angle, so light suffers total internal reflection; thus the crack
To increase the magnifying power of a telescope, the acts as a silver surface; that is why the crack in window
objective and eyepiece of higher power can be taken. But pane appears silvery.
in practice the magnifying power cannot be increased
beyond a certian limit. Explain. Example - 51

The bubbles of air rising up in a water tank appear silvery

Sol. It is useful to increase the magnifying power to a very large
when viewed from top, why ?
value only if the resolving power also increases. The
wavelength range of visible light is 4000 Å – 7800 Å i.e. Sol. When light falls on air-bubbles in water, the light travels
minimum wavelength is 4000 Å, hence resolution is not from water to air at an angle greater than critical angle, so
possible in objects smaller than a certain size, whatever be light suffers total internal reflection from the surface of
the magnifying power. bubbles, hence bubbles of air appear silvery.
Example - 49 Example - 52
The objective of telescope A has diameter 3 times that of a If the wavelength of visible light were 1 mm, then could we
the objective of telescope B. How much light is gathered make the thread to pass easily through the hole of a
by A compared to B ? stitching needle ? Explain.
Sol. The intensity of light transmitted through a lens inversely –7
Sol. No, the resolving limit of eye for wavelength  = 5 × 10 m
proportional to square of aperture.
0
2
 1 
IA  dA  is   . For wavelength  = 1 mm, it will be 33°.
   32  9  60 
I B  d B 

That is the intensity of light gathered by A is 9–times as

compared to B.
RAY OPTICS 44

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Plane Mirror
(a) x1x2 (b) x1x 2
1. A point source of light B is placed at a distance L in front
of the centre of a mirror of width d hung vertically on a (c) (x1 + x2)/2 (d) x1 / x 2
wall. A man walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel
to the mirror at a distance 2L from it as shown. The greatest 5. A convex mirror has a focal length f. A real object is placed at
distance over which he can see the image of the light source a distance f in front of it from the pole, produces an image at
in the mirror is (a) infinity (b) f
(c) f/2 (d) 2 f
6. A concave mirror of focal length f produces an image n times
the size of the object. If the image is real then the distance of
the object from the mirror, is
(a) (n – 1) f (b) {(n – 1)/n} f
(c) {(n + 1)/n} f (d) (n + 1) f
7. What is the magnification when the object is placed at a
distance of 2f from the pole of a convex mirror?
(a) d/2 (b) d
1 2 3
(c) 2d (d) 3d (a) (b) (c) 1 (d)
3 3 2
8. The image formed by a convex mirror of focal length 30 cm is
2. Two plane mirrors. A and B are aligned parallel to each one quarter of the size of object. The distance of object form
other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an the mirror is
angle of 30° at a point just inside one end of A. The plane (a) 30 cm (b) 120 cm
of incidence coincides with the plane of the figure. The
(c) 90 cm (d) 60 cm
maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflections
(including the first one) before it emerges out is 9. A convex mirror of focal length f produces an image
th
1
  of the size of the object. The distance of the object
n
from the mirror is
(a) nf (b) f/n
(c) (n + 1)/f (d) (n – 1) f
10. An object is placed at 10 cm from a lens and real image is
formed with magnification of 0.5. Then the lens is :
(a) 28 (b) 30 (A) concave with focal length of 10/3 cm
(c) 32 (d) 34 (B) convex with focal length of 10/3 cm
(C) concave with focal length of 10 cm
Spherical Mirror (D) convex with focal length of 10 cm
3. A square of side 3cm is placed at a distance of 25cm from 11. The distance of an object from the focus of a convex mirror
a concave mirror of focal length 10cm. The centre of the of radius of curvature ‘a’ is ‘b’. Then the
square is at the axis of the mirror and the plane is normal to
the axis. The area enclosed by the image of the square is distance of the image from the focus is :

(a) 4cm 2 (b) 6cm 2 b2 a

(A) (B)
(c) 16cm 2 (d) 36cm 2 4a b2

4. In a concave mirror an object is placed at a distance x1 from a2

the focus and the image is formed at a distance x2 from the (C) (D) none
focus. Then the focal length of the mirror is 4b
RAY OPTICS 45

12. Which of the following is not true about the image formed 20. A fish rising vertically with speed 3 m/s to the surface of
by covex mirror? water sees a bird diving vertically towards it with speed 9 m/
(a) It is erect (b) It is virtual s. Given aw = (4/3). The actual velocity of dive of bird is
(c) It is diminished (d) It lies beyond focus (a) 6 m/s (b) 4 m/s
13. For a real object, a convex mirror always forms an image (c) 8.4 m/s (d) 4.5 m/s
which is 21. An air bubble in glass slab ( = 1.5) appears to be at 6 cm
(a) real and inverted (b) virtual and inverted from one side and 4 cm from other side. The thickness of
glass slab is
(c) virtual and erect (d) real and magnified
(a) 10 cm (b) 6.67 cm
14. The image of a bright object is brought on the screen with a
concave mirror. If upper half of mirror is covered, what is the (c) 15 cm (d) none of these
effect on the image? 22. The apparent depth of water in cylindrical water tank of
(a) its size is halved (b) brightness is reduced diameter 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x cm/minute when
(c) image changes position (d) image disappears water is being drained out at a constant rate. The amount of
15. A convex mirror is used to form an image of a real object. water drained in c.c. per minute is ( n1 = refractive index of
Then tick the wrong statement air, n 2 = refractive index of water)
(a) the image lies between the pole and focus
(b) the image is diminished in size (a) x p R 2 n1 / n 2
(c) the image is erect (b) x p R 2 n 2 / n1
(d) the image is real
16. A concave mirror is used to form an image of the sun on a (c) 2 p R n1 / n 2
white screen. If the lower half on the mirror were covered (d) p R 2 x
with an opaque card, the effect on the image on the screen
would be 23. The refractive index of water with respect to air is 4/3 and the
refractive index of glass with respect to air is 3/2. The refractive
(a) to make the image less bright than before index of water with respect to glass is
(b) to make the lower half of the image disappear (a) 9/8 (b) 8/9
(c) to prevent image from being focussed (c) 1/2 (d) 2
(d) none of these Optical Path
Motion of object, mirror and image 24. Air has refractive index 1.0003. The thickness of air
17. A small plane mirror is placed at the centre of a spherical column, which will have one more wavelength of yellow
screen of radius R. A beam of light is falling on the mirror. If light (6000 Å) than in same thickness of vacuum, is
the mirror makes n revolutions per second, the speed of light (a) 2 mm (b) 2 cm
on the screen after reflection from the mirror will be
(c) 2 m (d) 2 km
(a) 4 nR (b) 2 nR
25. A glass slab of thickness 8 cm contain, the same number of
(c) nR/ (d) nR/4 wavelengths as 10 cm of water when both are traversed by
Apparent depth of image the same monochromatic light. If the refractive index of water
is 4/3, the refractive index of glass is
18. A vessel is half filled with a liquid of refractive index . The
other half of the vessel is filled with an immiscibel liquid of (a) 5/3 (b) 5/4
refractive index 1.5 . The apparant depth of the vessel is (c) 16/15 (d) 3/2
50% of the actual depth. Then  is
Speed of light in different media
(a) 1.4 (b) 1.5
26. A beam of monochromatic blue light of wavelength 420 nm
(c) 1.6 (d) 1.67 in air travels in water ( = 4/3). Its wavelength in water will be
Lens maker formula (a) 280 nm (b) 560 nm
19. If in a plano-convex lens, radius of curvature of convex (c) 315 nm (d) 400 nm
surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the lens is 30 cm, the Ans:(c)
refractive index of the material of the lens will be
27. If velocity of light in a certain medium is 1.5 × 108 m/s,  for
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.66 the medium would be
(c) 1.33 (d) 3 (a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 2.5 (d) 3
RAY OPTICS 46

28. The wavelength of sodium light is 589 nm in air. What will be

the wavelength of sodium light if it travels in glass of
refractive index 1.5 ?
(a) 589 nm (b) 589 × 1.5 nm
(c) (589/1.5) nm (d) none of these
Critical Angle
29. If the refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass slab is
5/3, then the critical angle of incidence for which a light
tending to go from glass to water is
(a) sin 1 (3 / 4) (b) sin 1 (3 / 5)

(c) sin 1 (2 / 3) (d) sin 1 (4 / 5)

(a)  = 49° (b)  = 90°
30. If the critical angle for total internal reflection from a medium
to vacuum is 30°, then the velocity of light in the medium is 1
(c)  = 98° (d)  = 24 
(a) 3 × 108 m/sec (b) 1.5 × 108 m/sec 2
36. A ray of light is incident at the glass–water interface at an
(c) 6 × 108 m/sec (d) 3 10 8 m / sec angle i, it emerges finally parallel to the surface of water,
31. The critical angle for a medium is 60°. Then refractive index then the value of  g would be
of the medium will be
(a) 3/2 (b) 2 / 3

(c) 2 /3 (d) 3
32. The refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass is 5/3.
What will be the critical angle for the ray of light entering
water from the glass
(a) sin–1 (4/5)
(b) sin–1 (5/4)
(a) (4/3) sin i (b) 1/sin i
(c) sin–1 (1/2)
(d) sin–1 (2/1) (c) 4/3 (d) 1
33. Light travels with a speed of 2 × 108 m/s in crown glass of 37. Two transparent media A and B are separated by a plane
refractive index 1.5. What is the speed of light in dense glass boundary. The speed of light in medium A is 2.0 108 m s 1
of refractive index 1.8 ?
and in medium B is 2.5 108 ms 1 . The critical angle for
(a) 1.33 × 108 m/s
which a ray of light going from A to B is totally internally
(b) 1.67 × 108 m/s reflected is
(c) 2.0 × 108 m/s
(d) 3.0 × 108 m/s 1  1  1  2 
(A) sin   (B) sin  
34. A ray of light enters from a denser medium into rarer medium. 2 5
The speed of light in the rarer medium is twice that in denser
medium. what is the critical angle for total internal reflection 1  4  1  1 
to take palce (C) sin   (D) sin  
5  3
(a) 60°
38. A small source of light is 4m below the surface of a liquid
(b) 45°
of refractive index 5 / 3 . In order to cut off all the light coming
(c) 30°
out of liquid surface, minimum diameter of the disc placed
(d) none of above on the surface of liquid is
35. A fish is a little away below the surface of a lake. If the critical
angle is 49°, then the fish could see things above the water (A) 3m (B) 4m
surface within an angular ring of ° where (C) 6m (D) 
RAY OPTICS 47

39. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world 43. A prism having an apex angle of 4 and refractive index of
contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive index of 1.50 is located in front of a vetical plane
water is 4 / 3 and fish is 12 cm below the surface, the mirror as shown. A horizontal ray of light is incident on the
radius of the circle in cm is prism. The total angle through which the ray is
deviated is
(A) 12  3  5 (B) 4  5

(C) 12  3  7 (D) 12  3 / 7
Prism
40. A graph is plotted between angle of deviation () and angle
of incidence (i) for a prism. The nearly correct graph is

(a) (b) (A) 4 clockwise (B) 178 clockwise

(C) 2 clockwise (D) 8 clockwise
44. A thin prism of angle 5 is placed at a distance of 10 cm
from object. What is the distance of the image from object?
(Given  of prism  1.5 

(A)  / 8 cm (B)  / 12 cm
(c) (d)
(C) 5 / 36 cm (D)  / 7 cm
45. An achromatic prism is made by crown glass prism

41. The refracting angle of prism is A and refractive index of

 Ac  19 and fl i n t glass prism  A F  6  . If
C
A  v  1.5 and F  v  1.66 , then resultant deviation for red
material of prism is cot . The angle of minimum deviation
2 coloured ray will be
is (a) 1.04° (b) 5°
(a) 180°– 3A (b) 180° + 2A (c) 0.96° (d) 13.5°
(c) 90° –A (d) 180° – 2A Refraction on curved surface
42. For a small angled prism, angle of prism A, the angle of 46. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm
minimum deviation (d) varies with the refractive index of
separates two medium x & y of refractive index 4 / 3 & 3 / 2
the prism as shown in the graph
respectively. If the object is placed along principal axis in
medium X then

(a) Point P corresponds to m = 1 (A) image is always real

(b) Slope of the line PQ = A/2 (B) image is real if the object distance is greater than 90 cm
(c) Slope = A (C) image is always virtual
(d) None of the above statements is true (D) image is virtual if the object distance is less than 90 cm
RAY OPTICS 48

47. A spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm separates Combination of Thin Lens

two media X and Y of refractive indices 3 / 2 and 4 / 3 53. A convex lens of focal length f is put in contact with a
respectively. Centre of the spherical surface lies in denser concave lens of same focal length. The focal length of
medium. An object is placed in medium combination is
X . For image to be real, the object distance must be (a) zero (b) 2f
(c) f (d) infinity
(A) greater than 90 cm (B) less than 90 cm
54. A concave and convex lens have same focal length of 20 cm
(C) greater than 80 cm (D) less than 80 cm and are put in contact. The combination is used to view an
object of 5 cm length kept at 20 cm from the lens combination.
Lenses As compared to object, the image will be
48. The size of the image of an object, which is at infinity, as (a) magnified and inverted (b) diminished and erect
formed by a convex lens of focal length 30cm is 2 cm. If a (c) of same size and erect (d) of same size and inverted
concave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed between the
55. Two thin lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are placed in contact.
convex lens and the image at a distance of 26 cm from the
The focal length of the complete lens is
convex lens, calculate the new size of the image
(a) 1.25 cm (b) 2.5 cm f1  f 2 f1  f 2
(a) (b) f f
2 1 2
(c) 1.05 cm (d) 2 cm
49. Two similar plano-convex lenses are combined together in f1f 2
three different ways as shown in the adjoining figure. The (c) f1f 2 (d) f  f
1 2
ratio of the focal lengths in three cases will be
56. Parallel rays of light are focussed by a thin convex lens. A
thin concave lens of same focal length is then joined to the
convex lens and the result is that
(a) the focal point shifts away from the lens by a small
distance
(b) the focal point shifts towards the lens by a small distance
(c) the focal point does not shift at all
(d) the focal point shifts to infinity
(a) 2 : 2 : 1 (b 1 : 1 : 1
57. Two thin lenses of focal lengths 20 cm and 25 cm are placed
(c) 1 : 2 : 2 (d) 2 : 1 : 1 in contact. The power of the combination is
50. Two symmetric double convex lenses A and B have same (a) 0.5 D (b) 9 D
focal length, but the radii of curvature differ so that (c) 5 D (d) 4.5 D
R A  0.9 R B . If n A  1.63, find n B . 58. The lenses of power +12 and –2 diopters are placed in contact.
What will be the focal length of the combination
(A)1.7 (B) 1.6
(C) 1.5 (D) 4/3 (a) 10 cm (b) 12.5 cm
(c) 16.6 cm (d) 8.33 cm
51. A virtual image three times the size of the object is obtained
with a concave mirror of radius of curvature 36cm. The 59. If an object is placed at A(OA > f); Where f is the focal
distance of the object from the mirror is length of the lens the image is found to be formed at B. A
perpendicular is erected at O and C is chosen on it such that
(a) 5cm (b) 12cm
the angle  BCA is a right angle. Then the value of f will be
(c) 10cm (d) 20cm
52. A lens forms a sharp image on a screen. On inserting a parallel
sided glass slab between the lens and the screen, it is found
necessary to move the screen a distance d away from the
lens in order for the image to be sharp again. If the refractive
index of the glass relative to air is , then the thickness of the
slab is
(a) d (b) d/
(c) ( – 1) d/ (d)  d/( – 1) (A) AB / OC2 (B)  OC  AB  /  AC  BC 
(C)  AC  BC  /  OC  (D) OC 2 / AB
RAY OPTICS 49

Lens maker formula 65. A thin symmetrical double convex lens of power P is cut
into three part, as shown in the figure. Power of A is :
60. The radius of curvature for a convex lens is 40 cm, for
each surface. Its refractive index is 1.5. The focal length
will be

(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 80 cm (d) 30 cm
61. If in a plano-convex lens, the radius of curvature of the
convex surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the lens is
30 cm, then the refractive index of the material of lens will P
(A) 2 P (B)
be 2

(a) 1.5 (b) 1.66 P

(C) (D) P
(c) 1.33 (d) 3 3
62. The curvature radii of a concavo-convex glass lens are 66. A double convex lens made of material of refractive index 1.5
20 cm and 60 cm . The convex surface of thelens is silvered. and having a focal length of 10 cm is immersed in a liquid of
With the lens horizontal, the concave surface is filled refractive index 3.0. The lens will behave as
with water. The focal length of the effective mirror (a) converging lens of focal length 10 cm
is   of glass  1.5,  of water 4 / 3 (b) diverging lens of focal length 10 cm
(c) convering lens of focal length 10/3 cm
(A) 90 / 13 cm (B) 80 / 13 cm
(d) converging lens of focal length 30 cm
(C) 20 / 3 cm (D) 45 / 8 cm 67. A double convex air bubble in water will behave as
Power and maagnification (a) convergent lens (b) divergent lens
63. The radius of curvature of the curved face of a thin (c) plane glass slab (d) concave mirror
planoconvex lens is 10 cm and it is made of glass of 68. A glass concave lens is placed in a liquid in which it behave
refractive index 1.5. A small object is approaching the lens like a convergent lens. If the refractive indices of glass and
with a speed of 1 cms-1 moving along the principal axis liquid with respect to air are ag and al respectively, then
(a) ag = 5 al (b) ag > al
Lens (c) ag < al (d) ag = 2 al
A B F C D Image Location, Magnification, Power
Object 69. A lens with power + P is immersed in water. Its power
2 3
(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) remains unchanged
When the object is at a distance of 30 cm from the lens, the (d) increases for red colour, decreases for blue
magnitude of the rate of change of the lateral magnification
70. Magnification produced by a concave lens can be
is
(a) more than one (b) equal to one
(A) 0.1 per second (B) 0.2 per second
(c) less than one (d) equal to or less than one
(C) 0.3 per second (D) 0.4 per second
71. A double convex lens of focal length 6 cm is made of glass
64. If two lenses of +5 diopters are mounted at some distance of refractive index 1.5. The radius of curvature of one surface
apart, the equivalent power will always be negative if the is double that of other surface. The value of larger radius of
distance is curvature is
(a) Greater than 40 cm (b) Equal to 40 cm (a) 6 cm (b) 4.5 cm
(c) Equal to 10 cm (d) Less than 10 cm (c) 9 cm (d) 4 cm
RAY OPTICS 50

72. A convergent lens of focal length 20 cm and made of a material 79. A compound microscope is used to enlarge an object kept
with refractive index 1.1 is immersed in water of refractive at a distance 0.03m from it’s objective which consists of
4 several convex lenses in contact and has focal length 0.02m.
index . The lens will behave as a If a lens of focal length 0.1m is removed from the objective,
3
then by what distance the eye-piece of the microscope must
(a) converging lens of focal length 20 cm be moved to refocus the image
(b) converging lens of focal length less than 20 cm
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 6 cm
(c) converging lens of focal length more than 20 cm
(c) 15 cm (d) 9 cm
(d) divergent lens.
80. If the focal length of the objective lens and the eye lens are
73. A thin convergent glass lens (g = 1.5) has a power of + 5.0 4 mm and 25 mm respectively in a compound microscope.
D. When this lens is immersed in a liquid of refractive index
The length of the tube is 16 cm. Find its magnifying power
l it acts as a divergent lens of focal length 100 cm. The value
of l must be for relaxed eye position
(a) 4/3 (b) 5/3 (a) 32.75 (b) 327.5
(c) 5/4 (d) 6/5 (c) 0.3275 (d) None of the above
74. A lens of power + 2 diopters is placed in contact with a lens 81. The magnifying power of a compound microscope in terms
of power – 1 diopoter. The combination will behave like of the magnifying power of objective Mo and that of the
eyepiece Me is
(a) A divergent lens of focal length 50 cm
(b) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm Mo
(a) M (b) M o  M e
e
(c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(d) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm (c) Mo + Me (d) Mo – Me
75. A lens of power + 2.0 D is placed in contact with another lens 82. Final image produced by the simple microscope is
of power – 1.0 D. The combination will behave like (a) real and erect (b) virtual and erect
(A) a converging lens of focal length 100 cm (c) real inverted (d) virtual and inverted
(B) a diverging lens of focal length 100 cm 83. The magnifying power of simple microscope can be increased
if we use an eyepiece of
(C) a converging lens of focal length 50 cm
(a) large focal length (b) smaller focal length
(D) a diverging lens of focal length 50 cm. (c) large diameter (d) smaller diameter
76. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a co-axial 84. A convex lens of focal length 3 cm is used as a simple
combination of two lenses A and B in contact. The microscope by a person having distance of least distinct
combination forms a real image three times the size of the vision as 30 cm. What is the maximum value of magnifying
object. If lens B is concave with a focal length of 30 cm, power?
what is the nature and focal length of lens A ? (a) + 10 (b) + 11
(A) Convex, 12 cm (B) Concave, 12 cm
11
(C) Convex, 6 cm (D) Convex, 18 cm (c) + 9 (d) 
10
Microscope 85. The final image produced in the compound microscope is
77. In a simple microscope, the distance of object from the lens (a) virtual and erect (b) real and erect
should be
(c) virtual and inverted (d) real and inverted
(a) more than the focal length of lens
Telescope
(b) less than the focal length of lens
(c) more than twice the focal length 86. The powers of the lenses of a telescope are 0.5 and 20
dioptres. Its magnifying power is
(d) more than focal length but less than twice the focal length
(a) 50 (b) 10
78. The magnifying power of simple microscope is
(c) 100 (d) 40
f D 87. The final image formed by an astronomical telescope is
(a) 1  (b) 1 
D f (a) virtual and upright
f 1 D 1 (b) virtual and inverted
(c) (d) (c) real and upright
D f
(d) real and inverted
RAY OPTICS 51
Astronomical Telescope
92. The objective of a telescope has focal length 120 cm and
88. An astronomical telescope essentially consists of diameter 5 cm. The focal length of eyepiece is 2 cm. The
(a) two concave lenses magnifying power for an object at infinity is
(b) two convex lenses (a) 24 (b) 60
(c) one concave and one convex lens (c) 12 (d) 300
(d) two plano-concave lenses 93. The distance of the moon from earth is 3.8 105 km The
89. The resolving power of a telescope can be increased by eye is most sensitive to light of wavelength 5500 Å. The
(a) increasing the focal length of objective separation of two points on the moon that can be resolved
(b) increasing the aperture and diameter of objective by a 500 cm telescope will be
(c) decreasing the focal length of objective (a) 51 m (b) 60 m
(d) decreasing the aperture diameter of objective (c) 70 m (d) All the above
90. For the normal setting of a telescope 94. In a reflecting telescope, the focal length of the eyepiece is
5 cm. What should be the radius of curvature of the objective
(a) only the object is at infinity.
mirror to have magnifying power of 40 ?
(b) only the final image is at infinity.
(a) 1m (b) 2m
(c) both the object and the final image are at infinity.
(c) 4m (d) 8 m
(d) neither the object nor the final image has to be at infinity
91. The focal length of objective of an astronomical telescope is
1 m. If the magnifying power of telescope is 20, then what is
length of telescope for relaxed eye?
(a) 85 cm (b) 95 cm
(c) 105 cm (d) 115 cm
RAY OPTICS 52

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. A thin convex lens of focal length ‘f ’ is put on a plane 4. An observer looks at a distant tree of height 10 m with a
mirror as shown in the figure. When an object is kept at a telescope of magnifying power of 20. To the observer the
distance ‘a’ from the lens– mirror combination, its image is tree appears : (AIEEE 2016)
a
formed at a distance in front of the combination. The (a) 10 times nearer (b) 20 times taller
3
value of ‘a’ is : (2015 Online) (c) 20 times nearer (d) 10 times taller
5. Two stars are 10 light years away from the earth. They are
seen through a telescope of objective diameter 30 cm. The
wavelength of light is 600 nm. To see the stars just resolved
by the telescope, the minimum distance between them
should be (1 light year = 9.46 × 1015m) of the order of :
(2016 Online Set-2)
3 6
(a) 10 km 8
(b) 10 km
(a) 3f (b) f
2 (c) 1011 km (d) 1010 km
(c) f (d) 2 f 6. In an experiment for determination of refractive index of
2. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air is smallest glass of a prism by i – , plot, it was found that a ray
near the ground and increase with height from the ground. incident at angle 35°, suffers a deviation of 40° and that it
When a light beam is directed horizontally, the Huygens’ emerges at angle 79°. In that case which of the following
principle leads us to conclude that as its travels, the light is closest to the maximum possible value of the refractive
beam : (AIEEE 2015) index? (AIEEE 2016)
(a) bends downwards
(a) 1.6 (b) 1.7
(b) bends upwards
(c) 1.8 (d) 1.5
(c) becomes narrower
7. A convex lens, of focal length 30 cm, a concave lens of
(d) goes horizontally without any deflection focal length 120 cm, and a plane mirror are arranged as
3. Monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism of angle shown. For an object kept at a distance of 60 cm from the
A. If the refractive index of the material of the prism is , a convex lens, the final image, formed by the combination,
ray, incident at an angle , on the face AB would get is a real image, at a distance of : (2016 Online Set-1)
transmitted through the face AC of the prism provided :
(AIEEE 2015)

1
  1  1  
 (a) 60 cm from the convex lens
(a)   cos  sin  A  sin     
      (b) 60 cm from the concave lens
(c) 75 cm from the convex lens
  1  1  

1 (d) 70 cm from the concave lens
(b)   cos  sin  A  sin     
      8. To find the focal length of a convex mirror, a student records
the following data:
1
  1  1  
 Object pin Convex Lens Convex Mirror Image Pin
(c)   sin  sin  A  sin     
      22.2 cm 32.2 cm 45.8 cm 71.2 cm
The focal length of the convex lens is f1 and that of mirror
1
  1  1  
 is f2. Then taking index correction to be negligibly small, f1
(d)   sin  sin  A  sin      and f2 are close to : (2016 Online Set-1)
     
RAY OPTICS 53

(a) f1 = 12.7 cm f2 = 7.8 cm 13. A particle is oscillating on the X-axis with an amplitude 2
(b) f1 = 7.8 cm f2 = 12.7 cm cm about the point x0 =10 cm, with a frequency  . A
concave mirror of focal length 5 cm is placed at the origin
(c) f1 = 7.8 cm f2 = 25.4 cm
(see figure).
(d) f1 = 15.6 cm f2 = 25.4 cm
9. A hemispherical glass body of radius 10 cm and refractive
index 1.5 is silvered on its curved surface. A small air bubble
is 6 cm below the flat surface inside it along the axis. The
position of the image of the air bubble made by the mirror
is seen : (2016 Online Set-2)
Identify the correct statements. (2018 Online Set-1)
(A) The image executes periodic motion.
(B) The image executes non-periodic motion.
(C) The turning points of the image are asymmetric w.r.t.
the image of the point at x =10 cm.
(D) The distance between the turning points of the
(a) 14 cm below flat surface
100
(b) 30 cm below flat surface oscillation of the image is cm.
21
(c) 20 cm below flat surface
(a) (A), (D) (b) (A), (C), (D)
(d) 16 cm below flat surface
(c) (B), (D) (d) (B), (C)
10. In an experiment a convex lens of focal length 15 cm is
14. A ray of light is incident at an angle of 600 on one face of
placed coaxially on an optical bench in front of a convex
a prism of angle 300. The emergent ray of light makes an
mirror at a distance of 5 cm from it. It is found that an
angle of 300 with incident ray. The angle made by the
object and its image coincide, if the object is placed at a
emergent ray with second face of prism will be :
distance of 20 cm from the lens. The focal length of the
convex mirror is : (2017 Online Set-2) (2018 Online Set-3)
(a) 27.5 cm (b) 20.0 cm (a) 00 (b) 900
(c) 450 (d) 300
(c) 25.0 cm (d) 30.5 cm
15. A convergent doublet of separated lenses, corrected for
11. A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length 25 cm is
spherical aberration, has resultant focal length of 10 cm.
placed at a distance of 15 cm from a converging lens of
The separation between the two lenses is 2cm. The focal
magnitude of focal length 20 cm. A beam of parallel light
lengths of the component lenses are :
falls on the diverging lens. The final image formed is :
(2018 Online Set-2)
(2017)
(a) 10 cm, 12 cm (b) 12 cm, 14 cm
(a) real and at a distance of 6 cm from the convergent lens. (c) 16 cm, 18 cm (d) 18 cm, 20 cm
(b) real and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens. 16. A planoconvex lens becomes an optical system of 28 cm
(c) virtual and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens focal length when its plane surface is silvered and
(d) real and at a distance of 40 cm from the divergent lens. illuminated from left to right as shown in Fig-A. If the
same lens is instead silvered on the curved surface and
12. Let the refractive index of a denser medium with respect to
illuminated from other side as in Fig.B, it acts like an optical
a rarer medium be n12 and its critical angle be c . At an system of focal length 10 cm. The refractive index of the
angle of incidence A when light is travelling from denser material of lens is : (2018 Online Set-1)
medium to rarer medium, a part of the light is reflected and
the rest is refracted and the angle between reflected and
refracted rays is 90°. Angle A is given by :
(2017 Online Set-1)

1 1
(a) 1 (b) 1
cos (sin C ) tan (sin C )

(c) cos 1 (sin C ) (d) tan 1 (sin C ) (a) 1.50 (b) 1.55
(c) 1.75 (d) 1.51
RAY OPTICS 54

17. In figure, the optical fibre is l = 2 m long and has a diameter 21. A concave mirror for face viewing has focal length of 0.4
of d = 20 μm. If a ray of light is incident on one end of the m. The distance (in m) at which you hold the mirror from
fibre at angle 1 = 40°, the number of reflections it makes your face in order to see your image upright with a
magnification of 5 is:
before emerging from the other end is close to:(refractive (2019-04-09/Shift -1)
index of fibre is 1.31 and sin 40° = 0.64) 22. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm produces images of
the same magnification 2 when an object is kept at two
(2019-04-08/Shift -1)
distance x1 and x2  x1  x2  from the lens. The ratio of x1
and x2 is :
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(a) 2: 1 (b) 3: 1
(c) 5: 3 (d) 4: 3
23. A thin convex lens L (refractive index = 1.5) is placed on a
plane mirror M. When a pin is placed at A, such that OA =
18 cm, its real inverted image is formed at A itself, as shown
in figure. When a liquid of refractive index i , is put between
(a) 55000 (b) 66000
the lens and the mirror, the pin has to be moved to A’,
(c) 45000 (d) 57000 such that OA = 27 cm, to get its inverted real image at A’
18. The electric field in a region is given itself. The value of 1 , will be:

by E   Ax  B  iˆ, where E is in NC–1 and x is in metres.
The values ofconstants are A = 20 SI unit and B = 10 SI
unit. If thepotential atx = 1 is V1 and that at x = –5 is V2,
then V1- V2
(2019-04-08/Shift -2)
(a) 320 V (b) –48 V (2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(c) 180 V (d) –520 V
4 3
19. A convex lens ( of focal length 20 cm) and a concavemirror, (a) (b)
3 2
having their principal axes along the same lines,are kept (c) 3 (d) 2
80 cm apart from each other. The concave mirroris to the 24. In moles of an ideal gas with constant volume heat
right of the convex lens. When an object is keptat a capacityCV undergo an isobaric expansion by certain
volume. Theratio of the work done in the process, to the
distance of 30 cm to the left of the convex lens, itsimage heat suppliedis:
remains at the same position even if the concavemirror is (2019-04-10/Shift -1)
removed. The maximum distance of the objectfor which nR
(a)
this concave mirror, by itself would produce avirtual image CV  nR

would be : nR
(b)
(2019-04-08/Shift -2) CV  nR
(a) 30 cm (b) 25 cm 4nR
(c)
(c) 10 cm (d) 20 cm CV  nR
20. Calculate the limit of resolution of a telescope 4nR
(d)
objectivehaving a diameter of 200 cm, if it has to detect CV  nR
light ofwavelength 500 nm coming from a star. 25. The graph shows how the magnification m produced by a
(2019-04-08/Shift -2) thin lens varies with image distance v. What is the focal
(a) 305 × 10-–9 radian (b) 610 × 10–9 radian length of the lens used?
(c) 152.5 × 10–9 radian (d) 457.5 × 10–9 radian
RAY OPTICS 55

(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
Then  must satisfy:
(2019-04-10/Shift -2)
1 1  1  22
b2 b2 c (a)   sin  (b)   sin 1
(a) (b) 2 12
ac a
a b 1  22 1 1 
(c) (d) (c)   sin 1 (d)   sin 
c c 12 2

26. The value of numerical aperature of the objective lens of a 29. Consider a tank made of glass (refractive index 1.5) with a
O thick bottom. It is filled with a liquid of refractive index μ.
microscope is 1.25 . If light of wavelength 5000 A is used,
A student finds that, irrespective of what the incident
the minimum separation between two points, to be seen angle i (see figure) is for a beam of light entering the liquid,
as distinct, will be : the light reflected from the liquid glass interface is never
completely polarized. For this to happen, the minimum value
(2019-04-12/Shift -1) of μ is:
(a) 0.24  m (b) 0.38  m
(c) 0.12  m (d) 0.48  m
27. A concave mirror has radius of curvature of 40 cm.at the
bottom of a glass that has water filled up to 5 cm (see
figure). If a small particle is floating on the surface water,
its image as seen, from directly above the glass, is at a
distance d from the surface of water. The value of d is
close to : (Refractive index of water = 1.33) (2019-01-09/Shift -1)
5 3
(a) (b)
3 5
5 4
(c) (d)
3 3
30. A convex lens is put 10 cm from a light source and it
makes a sharp image on a screen, kept 10 cm from the lens.
(2019-04-12/Shift -1) Now a glass block (refractive index 1.5) of 1.5 cm thickness
is placed in contact with the light source. To get the sharp
(a) 6.7 cm (b) 13.4 cm image again, the screen is shifted by a distance d. Then d
(c) 8.8 cm (d) 11.7 cm is: (2019-01-09/Shift -1)
28. A transparent cube of side d, made of a material of (a) 1.1 cm away from the lens
refractive index 2 is immersed in a liquid of refractive (b) 0
index 1  1  2  . A ray is incident on the face AB at an (c) 0.55 cm towards the lens
angle  (shown in the figure.). Total internal reflection (d) 0.55 cm away from the lens
takes place at point E on the face BC.
RAY OPTICS 56

31. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other such that a (a)
ray of light incident on the first mirror (M1) and parallel to
the second mirror (M2) is finally reflected from the second
mirror (M1) parallel to the first mirror (M1). The angle
between the two mirrors will be:
(2019-01-09/Shift -2)
(a) 45° (b) 60°
(c) 75° (d) 90°
(b)
32. A plano-convex lens of refractive index 1 and focal length
f1 is kept in contact with another plano-concave lens of
refractive index 2 and focal length f 2 . If the radius of
curvature of their spherical faces is R each and f1  2 f 2 ,
then 1 and  2 are related as:
(2019-01-10/Shift -1)
(a) 1  2  3 (b) 2 1   2  1 (c)
(c) 3 2  21  1 (d) 2 2  1  1
33. The eye can be regarded as a single refracting surface.
The radius of curvature of this surface is equal to that of
cornea (7.8 mm). This surface separates two media of
refractive indices 1 and 1.34. Calculate the distance from
(d)
the refracting surface at which a parallel beam of light will
come to focus.
(2019-01-10/Shift -2)
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm
(c) 4.0 cm (d) 3.1 cm
34. The variation of refractive index of a crown glass thin
prism with wavelength of the incident light is shown. 35. An object is at a distance of 20 m from a convex lens of
focal length 0.3 m. The lens forms an image of the object.
Which of the following graphs is the correct one, if Dm is If the object moves away from the lens at a speed of 5 m/
the angle of minimum deviation? s, the speed and direction of the image will be :
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
(a) 2.26 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(b) 0.92 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(c) 3.22 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens
(d) 1.16 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens
36. A monochromatic light is incident at a certain angle on
anequilateral triangular prism and suffers minimum
deviation.If the refractive index of the material of the prism
is 3 , then the angle of incidence is:
(2019-01-11/Shift -2)
(a) 90° (b) 30°
(c) 60° (d) 45°
RAY OPTICS 57

37. A point source of light, S is placed at a distance L in front (a) Image disappears (b) Magnified image
of the centre of plane mirror of width d which is hanging (c) Erect real image (d) No change
vertically on a wall. A man walks in front of the mirror 40. A plano-convex lens (focal length f2, refractive index 2 ,
along a line parallel to the mirror, at a distance 2L as shown radius of curvature R) fits exactly into a plano-concave
below. The distance over which the man can see the image lens (focal length f1, refractive index 1 , radius of curvature
of the light source in the mirror is: R) Their plane surfaces are parallel to each other. Then,
the focal length of the combination will be :
(2019-01-12/Shift -2)
R
(a) f1  f 2 (b)   
2 1

2 f1 f 2
(c) f  f (d) f1  f 2
1 2

(2019-01-12/Shift -1) 41. A spherical mirror is obtained as shown in the figure from
(a) d (b) 2d a hollow glass sphere. If an object is positioned in front of
the mirror, what will be the nature and magnification of the
d
(c) 3d (d) image of the object ? (Figure drawn as schematic and not
2
38. What is the position and nature of image formed by the to scale)
lens combination shown in figure? (f1, f2 are focal lengths) (2020-09-02/Shift -1)

(2019-01-12/Shift -1)
(a) 70 cm from point B at left; virtual
(a) Erect, virtual and unmagnified
(b) 40 cm from point B at Right; real
(b) Inverted, real and magnified
20
(c) cm from point B at Right; real (c) Erect, virtual and magnified
3
(d) Inverted, real and unmagnified
(d) 70 cm from point B at Right; real
42. A light ray enters a solid glass sphere of refractive index
39. Formation of real image using a biconvex lens is shown
  3 at an angle of incidence 60º. The ray is both
below:
reflected and refracted at the farther surface of the sphere.
The angle (in degrees) between the reflected and refracted
rays at this surface is ………. .
(2020-09-02/Shift -2)
43. An observer can see through a small hole on the side of a
jar (radius 15 cm) at a point at height of 15 cm from the
bottom (see figure). The hole is at a height of 45 cm. When
If the whole set up is immersed in water without disturbing the jar is filled with a liquid up to a height of 30 cm the
same observer can see the edge at the bottom of the jar. If
the object and the screen positions, what will one observe
the refractive index of the liquid is N/100, where N is an
on the screen? integer, the value of N is ……….. .
(2019-01-12/Shift -2) (2020-09-03/Shift -1)
RAY OPTICS 58
(a)

(b)

44. Two light waves having the same wavelength  in

vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first wave travels a
path L1 through a medium of refractive index n1 while the
second wave travels a path of length L2 through a medium
of refractive index n2. After this the phase difference
between the two waves is : (c)
(2020-09-03/Shift -2)

2 2  L1 L 2 
(a) (n1L1  n 2 L 2 ) (b)   n  n 
  1 2 

2  L 2 L1  2 (d)
(c)   n  n  (d) (n 2 L1  n1L 2 )
 1 2 
45. When an object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from a
concave mirror, the image is formed at a distance of 10 cm
from the mirror. If the object is moved with a speed of 9
cms–1, the speed (in cms–1) with which image moves at that
instant is ………. .
(2020-09-03/Shift -2)
49. A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of
46. In a compound microscope, the magnified virtual image is
formed at a distance of 25 cm from the eye-piece. The focal length 1 cm and an eye piece of focal length 5 cm
focal length of its objective lens is 1 cm. If the magnification with a separation of 10 cm. The distance between an object
is 100 and the tube length of the microscope is 20 cm, then and the objection lens, at which the strain on the eye is
the focal length of the eye-piece lens (in cm) is_________. n
(2020-09-04/Shift -1) minimum is cm. The value of n is ………….. .
40
47. The distance between an object and a screen is 100 cm. A
(2020-09-05/Shift -1)
lens can produce real imageof the object on the screen for
50. A prism of angle A = 1º has a refractive index   1.5. A
two different positions between the screen and the
good estimate for the minimum angle of deviation (in
object.The distance between these two positions is 40
degrees) is close to N/10. Value of N is.
 N  (2020-09-05/Shift -2)
cm. If the power of the lens is close to   D where N is 51. A point like object is placed at a distance of 1 m in front of
 100 
a convex lens of focal length 0.5 m. A plane mirror is placed
an integer, the value of N is _________. at a distance of 2 m behind the lens. The position and
(2020-09-04/Shift -2) nature of the final image formed by the system is:
48. For a concave lens of focal length f, the relation between (2020-09-06/Shift -1)
object and image distances u and v, respectively, from its (a) 1 m from the mirror, virtual
(b) 2.6 m from the mirror, virtual
pole can best be represented by (u = v is the reference line) :
(c) 1 m from the mirror, real
(2020-09-05/Shift -1)
(d) 2.6 m from the mirror, real
RAY OPTICS 59

52. A double convex lens has power P and same radii of 57. An object is gradually moving away from the focal point
curvature R of both the surfaces. The radius of curvature of a concave mirror along the axis of the mirror. The
graphical representation of the magnitude of linear
of a surface of a plano-convex lens made of the same
magnification (m) versus distance of the object from the
material with power 1.5 P is : mirror (x) is correctly given by(Graphs are drawn
(2020-09-06/Shift -2) schematically and are not to scale)
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
R 3R (a)
(a) (b)
3 2
R
(c) (d) 2R
2
53. If we need a magnification of 375 from a compound
microscope of tube length 150 mm and an objective of
focal length 5 mm, the focal length of the eye-piece should
be close to: (2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(b)
(a) 22mm (b) 2mm
(c) 12mm (d) 33mm
54. dentify the correct labels of A, B and C in the following
graph from the options given below:

(c)

Root mean square speed (Vrms); most probable speed

(d)
(Vmp); average speed (Vav)
(2020-01-07/Shift -2)
(a) A = Vmp, B = Vav, C = Vrms
(b) A = Vmp, B = Vrms, C = Vav
(c) A = Vav, B = Vrms, C = Vmp
(d) A = Vrms, B = Vmp, C = Vav
55. The magnifying power of a telescope with tube length 60 58. A telescope of aperture diameter 5 m is used to observe
cm is 5. What is the focal length of its eyepiece? the moon from the earth.Distance between the moon and
(2020-01-08/Shift -1) earth is 4 × 105 km. The minimum distance betweentwo
points on the moon’s surface which can be resolved using
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm
this telescope is close to (Wavelength of light is 5500 Å)
(c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm (2020-01-09/Shift -1)
56. A point object in air is in front of the curved surface of a (a) 60 m
plano-convex lens. The radius of curvature of the curved (b) 20 m
(c) 600 m
surface is 30 cm and the refractive index of lens material is
(d) 200 m
1.5, then the focal length of the lens (in cm) is
(2020-01-08/Shift -1)
RAY OPTICS 60

59. A vessel of depth 2! is half filled with a liquid of refractive 60. There is a small source of light at some depth below the
index 2 in upper half andwith a liquid of refractive 4
surface of water (refractive index ) in a tank of large
index 2 2 in lower half. The liquids are immiscible. 3
Theapparent depth of inner surface of the bottom of the cross sectional surface area. Neglecting any reflection from
vessel will be the bottom and absorption by water, percentage of light
(2020-01-09/Shift -1) that emerges out of surface is (nearly):
[Use the fact that surface area of a spherical cap of heighth
3h 2 h
(a) (b) and radius of curvature ris 2 rh ]
4 2
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
h h (a) 17% (b) 34%
(c)
3 2
(d) 2
 2 1 (c) 50% (d) 21%
RAY OPTICS 61

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. A point object is moving on the principal axis of a concave
mirror of focal length 24 cm towards the mirror. When it is (a) Smaller than f
at a distance of 60 cm from the mirror, its velocity is
9 cm/sec. What is the velocity of the image at that instant (b) Smaller than 2f
(a) 5 cm/sec towards the mirror (c) Larger than 2f
(b) 4 cm/sec towards the mirror (d) Larger than f
(c) 4 cm/sec away from the mirror 5. A cube of side 2 m is placed in front of a concave mirror of
focal length 1m with its face P at a distance of 3 m and
(d) 9 cm/sec away from the mirror face Q at a distance of 5 m from the mirror. The distance
2. As the position of an object (u) reflected from a concave between the images of face P and Q and height of images
mirror is varied, the position of the image (v) also varies. of P and Q are
By letting the u changes from 0 to + the graph between
v versus u will be
2m
v v P
2m
u u
(a) (b) Q 3m

v v
(a) 1 m, 0.5 m, 0.25 m (b) 0.5 m, 1 m, 0.25 m

u u (c) 0.5 m, 0.25 m, 1m (d) 0.25 m, 1m, 0.5 m

(c) (d) 6. A small piece of wire bent into an L shape with upright and
horizontal portions of equal lengths, is placed with the
horizontal portion along the axis of the concave mirror
3. If an object moves towards a plane mirror with a speed V whose radius of curvature is 10 cm. If the bend is 20 cm
at an angle  to the perpendicular to the plane of the mirror, from the pole of the mirror, then the ratio of the lengths of
find the relative velocity between the object and the image the images of the upright and horizontal portions of the
wire is
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 3 : 1
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 2 : 1
7. A thin rod of length f/3 lies along the axis of a concave
mirror of focal length f. One end of its magnified image
touches an end of the rod. The length of the image is
1
(a) f (b) f
2
(a) V (b) 2V
1
(c) 2V cos  (d) 2V sin  (c) 2 f (d) f
4
4. The graph shows variation of v with change in u for a
mirror. Points plotted above the point P on the curve are 8. A short linear object of length  lies along the axis of a
for values of v concave mirror of focal length f at a distance u from the
pole of the mirror. The size of the image is approximately
equal to
v
1/ 2 2
 u f   u f 
(a)    (b)   
P  f   f 
1/ 2 2
 f   f 
45° u (c)    (d)   
 u f   u f 
RAY OPTICS 62

9. The minimum distance between the object and its real 15. A fish rising vertically up towards the surface of water
image for concave mirror is with speed 3 ms–1 observes a bird diving vertically down
towards it with speed 9 ms–1. The actual velocity of bird is
(a) f (b) 2f
(c) 4f (d) Zero
10. A ray of light falls on the surface of a spherical glass paper y
weight making an angle  with the normal and is refracted
in the medium at an angle . The angle of deviation of the
emergent ray from the direction of the incident ray
(a) ( – ) (b) 2 ( – ) (a) 4.5 ms–1 (b) 5. ms–1
(c) 3.0 ms–1 (d) 3.4 ms–1
(c) ( – )/2 (d) ( – )
16. The apparent depth of water in cylindrical water tank of
11. A rectangular block of glass is placed on a printed page diameter 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x cm/minute when
lying on a horizontal surface. Then the minimum value of water is being drained out at a constant rate. The amount
refractive index of glass for which the letters on the page of water drained in c.c. per minute is (n1 = refractive index
are not visible from any of the vertical faces of the block is of air, n2 = refractive index of water)
2 2
(a) x  R n1/n2 (b) x  R n2/n1
(a) Equal to 2 (b) More than 2 2
(c) 2  R n1/n2 (d) R x
(c) Less than 2 (d) > = < 2 17. The image of point P when viewed from top of the slabs will be

12. One face of a rectangular glass plate 6 cm thick is silvered.

An object held 8 cm in front of the first face, forms an 1.5 cm
image 12 cm behind the silvered face. The refractive index
of the glass is
(a) 0.4 (b) 0.8 1.5 cm 1.5 cm

(c) 1.2 (d) 1.6

13. When a light wave goes from air into water, the quantity 2 cm
that remains unchanged is its P
(a) 2.0 cm above P (b) 1.5 cm above P
(a) Speed (b) Amplitude
(c) 2.0 cm below P (d) 1 cm above P
(c) Frequency (d) Wavelength 18. An observer can see through a pin-hole the top end of a
thin rod of height h, placed as shown in the figure. The
14. Two transparent slabs have the same thickness as shown. beaker height is 3h and its radius h. When the beaker is
One is made of material A of refractive index 1.5. The other filled with a liquid up to a height 2h, he can see the lower
is made of two materials B and C with thickness in the end of the rod. Then the refractive index of the liquid is
ratio 1 : 2. The refractive index of C is 1.6. If a
monochromatic parallel beam passing through the slabs
has the same number of waves inside both, the refractive
index of B is
3h
t t/3 2t/3
h

2h
A B C
5 5
(a) (b)  
2 2
(a) 1.1 (b) 1.2
(c) 1.3 (d) 1.4 3 3
(c)   (d)
2 2
RAY OPTICS 63

19. An under water swimmer is at a depth of 12 m below the 25. A large glass slab ( = 5/3) of thickness 8 cm is placed over
surface of water. A bird is at a height of 18 m from the a point source of light on a plane surface. It is seen that
surface of water, directly above his eyes. For the swimmer light emerges out of the top surface of the slab from a
the bird appears to be at a distance from the surface of circular area of radius R cm. What is the value of R ?
water equal to (Refractive Index of water is 4/3)
26. What will be the location of the image ?
(a) 24 m (b) 12 m
(a) 30 cm, right of lens (b) 60 cm, right of lens
(c) 18 m (d) 9 m
(c) 70 cm, left of lens (d) 40 cm, left of lens
20. A concave mirror is placed at the bottom of an empty
27. Angle of glass prism is 60° and refractive index of the material
tank with face upwards and axis vertical. When sunlight
of the prism is 1.414, then what will be the angle of incidence,
falls normally on the mirror, it is focussed at distance of
so that ray should pass symmetrically through prism
 4 (a) 38° 61’ (b) 35° 35’
32 cm from the mirror. If the tank filled with water    
 3 (c) 45° (d) 53° 8’
upto a height of 20 cm, then the sunlight will now get 28. Angle of a prism is 30° and its refractive index is 2 and
focussed at
one of the surface is silvered. At what angle of incidence,
(a) 16 cm above water level (b) 9 cm above water level a ray should be incident on one surface so that after
(c) 24 cm below water level (d) 9 cm below water level reflection from the silvered surface, it retraces its path
21. With respect to air critical angle in a medium for light of (a) 30° (b) 60°
red colour [1] is . Other facts remaining same, critical 1
angle for light of yellow colour [2] will be (c) 45° (d) sin 1.5
(a)  (b) More than  29. A prism having an apex angle 4o and refraction index 1.5 is
located in front of a vertical plane mirror as shown in
1
(c) Less than  (d)  figure. Through what total angle is the ray deviated after
2 reflection from the mirror
22. If critical angle for a material to air is 30°, the refractive
index of the material will be 90° 4°

(a) 1.0 (b) 1.5

(c) 2.0 (d) 2.5
23. A ray of light travels from an optically denser to rarer (a) 176o (b) 4o
medium. The critical angle for the two media is C. The (c) 178o (d) 2o
maximum possible deviation of the ray will be
30. The refracting angle of prism is A and refractive index of
  material of prism is cot A/2. The angle of minimum deviation is
(a)   C  (b) 2C
 2  (a) 180° – 3A (b) 180° + 2A
(c)  – 2C (d)  – C (c) 90° – A (d) 180° – 2A
24. An optical fibre consists of core of 1 surrounded by a 31. A rod of glass ( = 1.5) and of square cross section is bent
cladding of 2 < 1. A beam of light enters from air at an into the shape shown in the figure. A parallel beam of light
angle  with axis of fibre. The highest  for which ray can falls on the plane flat surface A as shown in the figure. If d
be travelled through fibre is is the width of a side and R is the radius of circular arc then
for what maximum value of d/R light entering the glass slab
through surface A emerges from the glass through B

(a) cos 1  22  12 (b) sin 1 12   22

1
(a) 1.5 (b) 0.5
(c) tan 1 12   22 (d) sec 12   22
(c) 1.3 (d) none of these
RAY OPTICS 64

32. Shown in the figure here is a convergent lens placed inside 36. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin
a cell filled with a liquid. The lens has focal length +20 cm transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of
when in air and its material has refractive index 1.50. If the two liquids L1 and L2 having refractive indices n1 and n2
liquid has refractive index 1.60, the focal length of the system is respectively (n2 > n1 > 1). The lens will diverge a parallel
beam of light if it is filled with
(a) Air and placed in air (b) Air and immersed in L1
(c) L1 and immersed in L2 (d) L2 and immersed in L1
37. A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both
surfaces of same radius of curvature R. On immersion in a
medium of refractive index 1.75 it will behave as a
(a) Convergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(b) Convergent lens of focal length 3.0 R
(a) + 80 cm (b) – 80 cm (c) Divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(c) – 24 cm (d) – 100 cm (d) Divergent lens of focal length 3.0 R
33. If the central portion of a convex lens is wrapped in black 38. In initial setup before the activities which of the following
paper as shown in the figure statement is correct.
(a) Observer O1 will see a real image at 60 cm from the lens
but observer O2 will not be able to see it.
(b) Observer O2 will see a real image at 60 cm from the lens
but observer O1 will not be able to see it.
(c) Both the observers will see a real image at 60 cm from
lens irrespective the positions of O1 and O2.
(d) Both the observers may or may not be able to see the
(a) No image will be formed by the remaining portion of image at 60 cm from lens depending on the positions of O1
the lens
and O2.
(b) The full image will be formed but it will be less bright
39. After activity – I, for which observer the intensity of image
(c) The central portion of the image will be missing will be reduced to half.
(d) There will be two images each produced by one of the
(a) for O1 (b) for O2
exposed portions of the lens
(c) both for O1 & O2 (d) neither for O1 nor for O2
34. The focal length of a converging lens is measured for
violet, green and red colours. It is respectively fv, fg, fr. We 40. Consider the lens involved to be plano-convex lens
will find (instead of equiconvex lens) of refractive index n and radius
(a) fv = fr (b) fv > fr R in the given arrangement and then find its focal length.
(c) fv < fr (d) fg > fr R 2R
35. The relation between n1 and n2, if behaviour of light rays (a)  2n  1 (b)  2n  1
is as shown in figure is

R 2R
(c) n  1  (d) 2  2n  1

n1 n2 41. There is an equiconvex glass lens with radius of each

face as R and ag = 3/2 and aw = 4/3. If there is water in
object space and air in image space, then the focal length
is
Lens
(a) 2R (b) R
(a) n1 >> n2 (b) n2 > n1
(c) 3 R/2 (d) R2
(c) n1 > n2 (d) n1 = n2
RAY OPTICS 65

42. A convex lens is used to produce a real image of the object (a) A single convergent beam
shown in the following figure
(b) Two different convergent beams
(c) Two different divergent beams

1 2 (d) A convergent and a divergent beam

47. A convex lens of focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of
4 3
10 cm focal length are placed so as to have the same axis.
If a parallel beam of light falling on convex lens leaves
concave lens as a parallel beam, then the distance between
Then the real inverted image is
two lenses will be
(a) 40 cm (b) 30 cm
1 2 2 1
(c) 20 cm (d) 10 cm
(a) 4 3 (b) 3 4
48. A lens of power +2 diopters is placed in contact with a
lens of power –1 diopter. The combination will behave like
(a) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm
4 3 3 4
(b) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(c) 1 2 (d) 2 1 (c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(d) A convergent lens of focal length 200 cm
43. Two point light sources are 24 cm apart. Where should a
convex lens of focal length 9 cm be put in between them 49. If two +5 diopter lenses are mounted at some distance
from one source so that the images of both the sources apart, the equivalent power will always be negative if the
are formed at the same place distance is
(a) 6 cm (b) 9 cm (a) Greater then 40 cm (b) Equal to 40 cm
(c) 12 cm (d) 15 cm (c) Equal to 10 cm (d) Less then 10 cm
44. In case of reflection by a plane-mirror, which of the
50. A glass hemisphere of radius 0.04 m and R.I. of the material
following statements are not correct
1.6 is placed centrally over a cross mark on a paper (i) with
(a) It can never give real image
the flat face ; (ii) with the curved face in contact with the
(b) It can never give inverted image
paper. In each case the cross mark is viewed directly from
(c) It changes left into right
above. The position of the images will be
(d) It changes front into back
(a) (i) 0.04 m from the flat face; (ii) 0.025 m from the flat face
45. What will be the focal length if its curved surface is
mirrored? (b) (i) At the same position of the cross mark ; (ii) 0.025 m
below the flat face
R 2R
(a) (b) (c) (i) 0.025 m from the flat face; (ii) 0.04 m from the flat face
 
(d) For both (i) and (ii) 0.025 m from the highest point of
R
(c) 2R (d) the hemisphere
2
46. A double convex lens, made of a material of refractive 51. An air bubble in sphere having 4 cm diameter appears 1 cm
index 1, is placed inside two liquids or refractive indices from surface nearest to eye when looked along diameter. If
2 and 3, as shown. 2 > 1 > 3. A wide, parallel beam of ag = 1.5, the distance of bubble from refracting surface is
light is incident on the lens from the left. The lens will give
(a) 1.2 cm (b) 3.2 cm
rise to
(c) 2.8 cm (d) 1.6 cm
52. The lens system of the myopic eye is best described as
(a) producing too much convergence
(b) producing too little convergence
(c) producing too much divergence
(d) producing too little divergence
RAY OPTICS 66

53. After activity – I, which of the following observer will not 56. An image of a bright square is obtained on a screen with
be able to see the image of object, if before this activity the aid of a convergent lens. The distance between the
both were seeing the image. square and the lens is 40 cm. The area of the image is nine
(a) O1 (b) O2 times larger than that of the square. Select the correct
(c) both O1 & O2 (d) neither O1 nor O2 statement(s):
(a) Image is formed at a distance of 120 cm from the lens
Multiple Correct Option
(b) Image is formed at a distance of 360 cm from the lens
54. A glass prism is immersed in a hypothetical liquid. The
curves show in the refractive index n as a function of (c) Focal length of the lens is 30 cm
wavelength  for glass and liquid are as shown in the (d) Focal length of the lens is 36 cm.
following figures. When a ray of white light is incident on
the prism parallel to the base 57. Mark the correct statement(s) out of the following :
(a) A plane mirror can from a real image
(b) Plane mirror can form an inverted image
(c) A plane mirror may reverse left and right
(d) A plane mirror may reverse up and down
58. Which of the following statements are correct ?
(a) A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror and gets
reflected. If the mirror is rotated through an angle , then
the reflected ray gets deviated through angle 2
(b) A ray of light gets reflected successively from two
(a) yellow ray travels without deviation mirrors which are mutually inclined. Angular deviation
(b) blue ray is deviated towards the vertex suffered by the ray does not depend upon angle of
(c) red ray is deviated towards the base incidence on first mirror
(d) there is no dispersion (c) A plane mirror cannot form real image of a real object
55. An object is placed in front of a converging lens at a (d) If an object approaches towards a plane mirror with
distance equal to twice the focal length f1 of the lens. On velcocity v, then the image approaches the object with
the other side of the lens is a concave mirror of focal length
velocity 2v
f2 separated from the lens by a distance 2 (f1 + f2). Light
from the object passes rightward through the lens, reflects 59. A light ray is going from one medium to another. Then,
from the mirror, passes leftwards through the lens, and (a) its wavelength may increase or decrease
forms a final image of the object
(b) its wavelength will decrease
(c) frequency and velocity both may change
(d) frequency remains the same
60. A man of height 170 cm wants to see his complete image in
a plane mirror (while standing). His eyes are at a height of
O 160 cm from the ground.
f2 (a) Minimum length of the mirror = 80 cm
f1
(b) Minimum length of the mirror = 85 cm
(c) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height 80 cm
(a) The distance between the lens and the final image is (d) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height 85 cm
equal to 2f1. 61. A real object is moving toward a fixed spherical mirror. The
(b) The distance between the lens and the final image is image
equal to 2 (f1 + f2).
(a) must move away from the mirror
(c) The final image is real, inverted and of same size as that
of the object. (b) may move away from the mirror
(d) The final image is real, erect and of same size as that of (c) may move toward the mirror if the mirror is concave
the object. (c) must move toward the mirror if the mirror is convex
RAY OPTICS 67

62. The object distance u, the image distance v and the 66. If two mirrors are inclined to each other at 90°, the image
magnification m in a lens follow certain linear relations. seen may be
These are
(a) One (b) Two
1 1 (c) Three (d) Four
(a) versus (b) m versus u
u v
67. A parallel beam of light is incident normally on the flat
(c) u versus v (d) m versus v
surface of a hemisphere of radius 6 cm and refractive index
63. The radius of curvature of the left and right surface of the 1.5, placed in air as shown in figure (i). Assume paraxial
concave lens are 10 cm and 15 cm respectively. ray approximation.

air

Glass

P P
6 cm
The radius of curvature of the mirror is 15 cm.
(a) equivalent focal length of the combination is –18 cm Figure (i) Figure (ii)
(b) equivalent focal length of the combination is +36 cm
(c) the system behaves like a concave mirror
(a) The rays are focussed at 12 cm from the point P to the
(d) the system behaves like a convex mirror
right, in the situation as shown in figure (i).
64. The distance between an electric lamp and a screen is d =
1 m. A convergent lens of focal length f = 21 cm is placed (b) The rays are focussed at 16 cm from the point P to the
between the lamp and the lens such that a sharp image of right, in the situation as shown in figure (i).
the lamp filament is formed on the screen. (c) If the rays are incident at the curved surface (figure (ii))
(a) The positions of the lens from the lamp for which sharp then these are focussed at distance 18 cm from point P to
images are formed on the screen are 35 cm and 65 cm the right.
(b) The positions of the lens from the lamp for which sharp (d) If the rays are incident at the curved surface (figure (ii))
images are formed on the screen are 30 cm and 70 cm then these are focussed at distance 14 cm from point P to
(c) Magnitude of the difference in magnification is 40/21 the right.
(d) The size of the lamp filament for which there are two 68. A biconvex thin lens of refractive index 2 = 1.4 has a radii
sharp images of 4.5 cm and 2 cm, is 3 cm. of curvature R1 = 20 cm and R2 = 60 cm, 1 = 1.5 and 3 =
65. Figure shows variation of magnification m (produced by a 1.2. Focal length are f1 and f2 in both the media
thin convex lens) and distance v of image from pole of the
lens. Which of the following statements are correct ?

R1 R2

(a) Focal length of the lens is equal to intercept on v–axis

(b) Focal length of the lens is equal to inverse of slope of (a) the lens behaves as a concave lens
the line
(b) f1 = f2
(c) Magnitude of intercept on m–axis is equal to unity
(c) f1  f2
(d) None of above.
(d) the lens behaves as a convex lens
RAY OPTICS 68

69. A ray of light is incident normally on one face of 30°– (a) A is P (b) A is 2P
60°– 90° prism of refractive index 5/3 immersed in water (c) B is P/2 (d) B is P/4
of refractive index 4/3 as shown in figure
Integer Type
73. A converging beam of light forms a sharp image on a
P screen. A lens is placed 10 cm from the screen in the path
of the beam. It was found that the screen has to be moved
8 cm further away to obtain the sharp image. Find the focal
30° length of the lens in mm.
74. A concave mirror gives a real image magnified 4 times.
When the object is moved 3 cm the magnification of the
–1
(a)\ The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin (5/8) real image is 3 times. Find the focal length of mirror.
 5  75. The magnification of an object placed in front of a convex
(b) The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin  
–1
4 3 lens is +2. The focal length of the lens is 2.0 m. Find the
(c) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive distance by which the object has to be moved to obtain a
5 magnification of –2 (in metres).
index of water is increased to by dissolving some 76. Refraction takes palce at a concave spherical boundary
2 3
substance separating glass and air medium. The refractive index of
the glass is 3/2. The radius of curvature of the refracting
(d) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive surface is R. For the image to be real the object distance
index of water is increased to 5/6 by dissolving some should be greater than IR, wher I is an integer. Find the
substance minimum value of I.
70. Which of the following can form diminished, virtual and 77. In a lake 2m deep, a measuring post of height 3m is fixed
erect image of your face ? vertically. For an angle of incidence of 45° of Sun’s
(a) Converging mirror (b) Diverging mirror radiations, find the length of the shadow of the post at the
bottom surface ? [w = 4/3] [in metre)
(c) Converging lens (d) Diverging lens
78. As isotropic glass slab of refractive index 1.5 is 30 cm
71. A fish, F in the pond is at a depth of 0.8 m from the water thick. The rear surface of the slab is polished. A point
surface and is moving vertically upwards with velocity source. S is placed at a distance of 20 cm from the front
2 m/s. At the same instant a bird B is at a height of 6 m from surface. Calculate the distance between the source and
the water surface and is moving downwards with velocity the image formed by reflection and refractions.
3 m/s. At this instant both are on the same vertical line as
shown in the figure. Which of the following statements Assertion Reason
are correct ? (A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II is
a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.
(D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
79. Statement–1 : Maximum possible angle of refraction in a
medium is critical angle.
(a) Height of B, observed by F (from itself) is equal to 5.30 m Statement–2 : The critical angle c (or ) depends upon
(b) Depth of F, observed by B (from itself) is equal to 6.60 m pair of medium, colour of light (or ) and temperature.
(c) Height of B, observed by F (from itself) is equal to 8.80 m (a) A (b) B
(d) None of these (c) C (d) D
80. Statement–1 : If both plane mirror and object are moved
72. A thin, symmetric double-convex lens of power P is cut
through a distance x, then the image moves through a
into three parts A, B and C as shown. The power of
distance 3x.
A
Statement–2 : When the object is fixed and plane mirror
will moved through a distance x. Then the image is also
move through the distance x.
B C (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
RAY OPTICS 69

81. Statement–1 : A virtual image can be photographed. 90. Statement-1 : The images formed by total internal
Statement–2 : Only real objects are photographed. reflections are much brighter than those formed by mirrors
(a) A (b) B of lenses.
(c) C (d) D Statement-2 : There is no loss of intensity in total internal
82. Statement–1 : All large telescopes use parabolic mirrors reflection.
rather than spherical mirrors. (a) A (b) B
Statement–2 : A parabolic mirror brings parallel rays (rays (c) C (d) D
parallel to its axis) to an exact focus at an point. 91. Statement-1 : There exist two angles of incidence for the
(a) A (b) B same magnitude of deviation (except minimum deviation)
(c) C (d) D by a prism kept in air.
83. Statement-1 : A fish inside a pond will see a person Statement-2 : In a prism kept in air, a ray is incident on the
standing outside taller than he actually is. first surface and emerges out of second surface. Now, if
Statement-2 : Light bends away from the normal as it enters another ray is incident on the second surface (of prism)
water from air. along the previous emergent ray it emergs along the
(a) A (b) B previous incident ray. This principle is called principle of
(c) C (d) D reversibility of light.
84. Statement-1 : Keeping a point object fixed, if a plane mirror (a) A (b) B
is moved, the image will also move. (c) C (d) D
Statement-2 : In case of a plane mirror, distance of object Match the Column
and its image is equal from any point on the mirror. 92. An extended object is moving in front of concave mirror
(a) A (b) B as shown in figure. On L.H.S. various velocity of object
(c) C (d) D and position is given. On R.H.S. some properties of image
85. Statement-1 : A convex lens of focal length f ( = 1.5) and its velocity is given.
behaves as a diverging lens when immersed in carbon di-
sulphied of higher refractive index ( = 1.65).
Statement-2 : The focal length of a lens does not depend
on the color of light used. +ve
(a) A (b) B x
(c) C (d) D
86. Statement–1 : When a concave mirror is held under water,
its focal length will increase. Column – I (Object) Column – II (Image)
Statement–2 : The focal length of a concave mirror is (A) +ve velocity and object is (P) +ve velocity
independent of the medium in which it is placed. between focus and
(a) A (b) B centre of curvature.
(c) C (d) D (B) –ve velocity and object is (Q) –ve velocity
87. Statement-1 : The critical angle in case of total internal between focus and pole
reflection depends on the pair of medium chosen. (C) –ve velocity and object is (R) size of image is
Statement-2 : The critical angle in case of total internal beyond centre of curvature increasing
reflection is independent of pair of medium chosen.
(a) A (b) B (D) –ve velocity and object is (S) size of image is
(c) C (d) D virtual decreasing
88. Statement-1 : For observing traffic at over back, we prefer 93. Four particles are moving with different velocities in front
to use a convex mirror. of stationary plane mirror (lying in y-z plane). At t = 0,
Statement-2 : A convex mirror has a large field of view  
velocity of A is v A  î , velocity of B is v B  î  3 ĵ ,
than a plane mirror or concave mirror.
 
(a) A (b) B velocity of C is v C  5 î  6 ĵ , velocity of D is v D  3 î  ĵ .
(c) C (d) D 
89. Statement-1 : Although the surface of goggle lenses are Acceleration of particle A is a A  2 î  ĵ and acceleration
curved, it does not have any power. 
of particle C is a C  2 t ĵ . The particle B and D move with
Statement-2 : In case of goggle, both the curved surface
have equal radii of curvature and have centre of curvature uniform velocity (Assume no collision to take place till
on the same side. t = 2 seconds). All quantities are in S.I. units. Relative
(a) A (b) B velocity of image of object A with respect to object A is
(c) C (d) D 
denoted by VA, A . Velocity of images relative to
RAY OPTICS 70

corresponding objects are given to Column – I and their 96. An object O (real) is placed at focus of an equi-biconvex
values are given in Column – II at t = 2 second. Match lens as shown. The refractive index of the lens is  = 1.5
Column – I with corresponding values in Column – II. and the radius of curvature of either surface of lens is R.
A The lens is surrounded by air. In each statement of column
D
y B I, some changes are made to situation given above and
C information regarding final image formed as a result is given
in Column II. The distance between lens and object is
unchanged in statements of column I. Match the
Statements in column I with resulting image in column II.
x

Column – I Column – II

(A) VA, A (P) 2 î

(B) VB, B (Q)  6 î

(C) VC, C (R)  12 î  4 ĵ

(D) VD, D (S)  10 î Column I Column II
94. An object O is kept perpendicular to the principal axis of a (a) If the refractive index of (p) Final image is real
spherical mirror. Each situation (a, b, c and d) gives object
the lens is doubled (that
coordinate u in centimeter with sign, the type of mirror,
and then the distance (centimeters with sign) between the is made 2), then
focal point and the pole of the mirror. On the right side (b) If the radius of curvature (q) Final image is virtual
information, regarding the image is given. is doubled (that is, made
Correctly, match the situation on the left side with the
images described on the right side. 2R),
Situation u (c) If a glass slab of refractive (r) Final image becomes
Mirror Images index  = 1.5 is introduced smaller in size in compari-
(a) –18 Concave, 12 (p) Real, erect, enlarged between the object and sion to size of image before
(b) –12 Concave, 18 (q) Virtual, erect, diminished
lens as shown, then the change was made
(c) –8 Convex, 10 (r) Real, inverted, enlarged
(d) –10 Convex, 8 (s) Virtual, erect, enlarged R R
95. A white light ray is incident on a glass prism, and it create
four refracted rays, A, B, C and D. Match the refracted O
rays with the colors given (1 and D are rays due to total
internal reflection) :
Slab

(d) If the left side of lens is (s) Final image is of same size
filled with a medium of as the object
refractive index  = 1.5
as shown, then
Column-I (Ray) Columm-II (Colour) R R
(a) A (p) red Air
(b) B (q) green O
(c) C (r) yellow
(d) D (s) blue
RAY OPTICS 71

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is 5. A rectangular glass slab ABCD of refractive index n1 is
(a) virtual, erect and magnified (IITJEE 2000) immersed in water of refractive index n2 (n1 > n2). A ray of
(b) real, erect and magnified light is incident at the surface AB of the slab as shown.
The maximum value of the angle of incidence max, such
(c) real, inverted and magnified that the ray comes out only from the other surface CD, is
(d) virtual, erect and reduced given by (IITJEE 2000)
2. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin
transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of A D
two liquids L1 or L2 having refracting indices n1 and n2
respectively (n2 > n1 > 1). The lens will diverge a parallel n1 n2
beam of light if it is filled with (IITJEE 2000)
(a) air and placed in air (b) air and immersed in L1 B C
(c) L1 and immersed in L2 (d) L2 and immersed in L1

1 n 1  1 n 2 
3. A diverging beam of light from a point source S having
(a) sin  n cos  sin n 
divergence angle  falls symmetrically on a glass slab as  2  1 
shown. The angles of incidence of the two extreme rays
are equal. If the thickness of the glass slab is t and its   1 n 2 
1
refractive index is n, then the divergence angle of the (b) sin n 1 cos  sin 
emergent beam is (IITJEE 2000)   n 1 

S 1  n 
(c) sin  1 
 n2 

i i 1  n 
(d) sin  2 
 n1 

n
6. A given ray of light suffers minimum deviation in an
t
equilateral prism P. Additional prisms Q and R of identical
shape and of the same material as P are now added as
shown in the figure. The ray will suffer (IITJEE 2001)
(a) zero (b) 
–1 –1
(c) sin (1/n) (d) 2 sin (1/n) Q

4. A point source of light S, placed at a distance L in front of P R

the centre of a plane mirror of width d, hangs vertically on
a wall. A man walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel
to the mirror at a distance 2L from it as shown. The greatest (a) greater deviation (b) no deviation
distance over which he can see the image of the light
source in the mirror is (IITJEE 2000) (c) same deviation as before (d) total internal reflection
7. A ray of light passes through four transparent media with
refractive indices 1, 2, 3 and 4 as shown in the figure.
The surfaces of all media are parallel. If the emergent ray
CD is parallel to the incident ray AB, we must have
d S
(IITJEE 2001)

L
2L D

C
B
A
(a) d/2 (b) d
(c) 2d (d) 3d
RAY OPTICS 72

(a) 1 = 2 (b) 2 = 3 (a) 28 (b) 30 (IITJEE 2002)

(c) 3 = 4 (d) 4 = 1 (c) 32 (d) 34
8. An observer can see through a pin-hole the top end of a 11. The size of the image of an object, which is at infinity, as
thin rod of height h, placed as shown in the figure. The formed by a convex lens of focal length 30 cm is 2 cm. If a
beaker height is 3h and its radius h. When the beaker is concave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed between the
filled with a liquid up to a height 2h, he can see the lower convex lens and the image at a distance of 26 cm from the
end of the rod. Then the refractive index of the liquid is convex lens, calculate the new size of the image.
(IITJEE 2002) (IITJEE 2003)
(a) 1.25 cm (b) 2.5 cm
(c) 1.05 cm (d) 2 cm
12. A ray of light is incident at the glass-water interface at an
angle i, it emerges finally parallel to the surface of water,
then the value of g would be (IITJEE 2003)

3h
Air
h
r
2h
r
Water

5 5 Glass
(a) (b) i
2 2

3 3
(c) (d) (a) (4/3) sin i (b) 1/sin i
2 2
(c) 4/3 (d) 1
9. Which one of the following spherical lenses does not
exhibit dispersion ? The radii of curvature of the surfaces 13. White light is incident on the interface of glass and air as
of the lenses are as given in the diagrams (IITJEE 2002) shown in the figure. If green light is just totally internally
reflected then the emerging ray in air contains. (2004)

(a) R1 R2 (b) R
Air Green

Glass
White
(c) R R (d) R

(a) yellow, orange, red (b) violet, indigo, blue

10. Two plane mirrors A and B are aligned parallel to each (c) all colours (d) all colours except green
other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an 14. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism
angle 30° at a point just inside one end of A. The plane of placed on a horizontal table. For minimum deviation which
incidence coincides with the plane of the figure. The of the following is true ? (IITJEE 2004)
maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflections
(including the first one) before it emerges out is

2 3m Q R
B
S
P
0.2 m 30°

A
(a) PQ is horizontal (b) QR is horizontal
(c) RS is horizontal (d) Either PQ or RS is horizontal
RAY OPTICS 73

15. A point object is placed at the centre of a glass sphere of 20. A point object is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a thin
radius 6 cm and refractive index 1.5. The distance of the planoconvex lens of focal length 15 cm. The plane surface
virtual image from the surface of the sphere is of the lens is now silvered. The image created by the
(IITJEE 2004) system is at (IITJEE 2006)
(a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm
(c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm
16. A container is filled with water ( = 1.33) upto a height of
33.25 cm. A concave mirror is placed 15 cm above the water
level and the image of an object placed at the bottom is
formed 25 cm below the water level. The focal length of
the mirror is (IITJEE 2005) 20 cm

(a) 60 cm to the left of the system

(b) 60 cm to the right of the system
15cm

(c) 12 cm to the left of the system

(d) 12 cm to the right of the system
25 cm

21. A ray of light travelling in water is incident on its surface

33.25cm

open to air. The angle of incidence is , which is less than

I the critical angle. Then there will be (IITJEE 2007)
O (a) only a reflected ray and no refracted ray
(b) only a refracted ray and no reflected ray
(a) 10 cm (b) 15 cm (c) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle between
(c) 20 cm (d) 25 cm them would be less than 180° – 2
17. A convex lens is in contact with concave lens. The (d) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle
magnitude of the ratio of their focal length is 3/2. Their between them would be greater than 180° – 2
equivalent focal length is 30 cm. What are their individual
focal lengths ? (IITJEE 2005) 22. In an experiment to determine the focal length (f) of a
concave mirror by the u-v method, a student places the
(a) –75, 50 (b) –10, 15
object pin A on the principal axis at a distance x from the
(c) 75, 50 (d) –15, 10 pole P. The student looks at the pin and its inverted image
18. The graph between object distance u and image distance from a distance keeping his/her eye in line with PA. When
v for a lens is given below. The focal length of the lens is the student shifts his/her eye towards left, the image appears
(IITJEE 2006) to the right of the object pin. Then (IITJEE 2007)
v (a) x < f (b) f < x < 2f
(c) x = 2f (d) x > 2f
23. Two beams of red and violet colours are made to pass
+11 separately through a prism (angle of the prism is 60°). In
the position of minimum deviation, the angle of refraction
+10
will be (IITJEE 2008)
45°
+9 u (a) 30° for both the colours
–9 –10 –11
(b) greater for the violet colour
(a) 5  0.1 (b) 5  0.05
(c) greater for the red colour
(c) 0.5  0.1 (d) 0.5  0.05
(d) equal but not 30° for both the colours
19. A biconvex lens of focal length f forms a circular image
of radius r of sun in focal plane. Then which option is 24. A light beam is travelling from Region I to Region IV (Refer
correct ? (IITJEE 2006) figure). The refractive index in Regions I, II, III and IV are
2
(a) r  f n0 n0 n
2
(b) r  f
2 n0, , and 0 , respectively. The angle of incidence
2 6 8
(c) If lower half part is convered by black sheet, then area of  for which the beam just misses entering Region IV is
2
the image is equal to r /2 (IITJEE 2008)
(d) If f is doubled, intensity will increase
RAY OPTICS 74

1 ˆ
Region I Region II Region III Region IV 29. A ray of light travelling in the direction
2
 
i  3 ˆj is
incident on a plane mirror. After reflection, it travels along
n0 n0 n0
2 6 8 1 ˆ
n0 the direction
2
 
i  3 ˆj . The angle of incidence is : (2013)
(a) 30° (b) 45°
0 0.2 m 0.6 m
(c) 60° (d) 75°
1  3  1  1 
30. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a transparent
(a) sin   (b) sin   block of height 10 mm and refractive index 2.72. It is
4 8 immersed in a lower refractive index liquid as shown in the
figure. It is found that the light emerging from the block to
1  1  1  1  the liquid forms a circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm
(c) sin   (d) sin  
4 3 on the top of the block. The refractive index of the liquid is
(IITJEE 2014)
25. A ball is dropped from a height of 20 m above the surface
of water in a lake. The refractive index of water is 4/3. A
fish inside the lake, in the line of fall of the ball, is looking
at the balls. At an instant, when the ball is 12.8 m above the
water surface, the fish sees the speed of ball as (2009)
–1 –1
(a) 9 ms (b) 12 ms
–1 –1
(c) 16 ms (d) 21.33 ms
(a) 1.21 (b) 1.30
26. A biconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is in front of a plane
mirror. The distance between the lens and the mirror is 10 (c) 1.36 (d) 1.42
cm. A small object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from the 31. Two identical glass rods S1 and S2 (refractive index = 1.5)
lens. The final image is (IITJEE 2010) have one convex end of radius of curvature 10 cm. They
(a) virtual and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror are placed with the curved surface at a distance d as shown
in the figure, with their axes (shown by the dashed line)
(b) real and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror aligned. When a point source of light P is placed inside
(c) virtual and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror rod S1 on its axis at a distance of 50 cm from the curved
(d) real and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror face, the light rays emanating from it are found to be
parallel to the axis inside S2. The distance d is (2015)
27. A light travelling in glass medium is incident on glass-air
interface at an angle of incidence . The reflected (R) and
transmitted (T) intensities, both as function of , are
plotted. The correct sketch is (IIT JEE 2011)

(a) 60 cm (b) 70 cm
(c) 80 cm (d) 90 cm
(a) (b) 32. A parallel beam of light is incident from air at an angle 
on the side PQ of a right angled triangular prism of
refractive index n = 2 . Light undergoes total internal
reflection in the prism at the face PR when  has a minimum
value of 45°. The angle  of the prism is (IITJEE2016)

(c) (d)

28. The image of an object, formed by a plano-convex lens at a

distance of 8 m behind the lens, is real and is one-third the
size of the object. The wavelength of light inside the lens is
2/3 times the wavelength in free space. The radius of the
curved surface of the lens is : (IIT JEE 2013)
(a) 15° (b) 22.5°
(a) 1 m (b) 2 m
(c) 30° (d) 45°
(c) 3 m (d) 6 m
RAY OPTICS 75

33. A small object is placed 50 cm to the left of a thin convex Multiple Correct Option
lens of focal length 30 cm. A convex spherical mirror of
radius of curvature 100 cm is placed to the right of the 35. A student performed the experiment of determination of
lens at a distance of 50 cm. The mirror is tilted such that focal lenght of a concave mirror by u–v method using an
the axis of the mirror is at an angle = 30° to the axis of optical bench of length 1.5 m. The focal length of the mirror
the lens, as shown in the figure. used is 24 cm. The maximum error in the location of the
image can be 0.2 cm. The 5 sets of (u, v) values recorded
by the student (in cm) are (42, 56), (48, 48), (60, 40), (66, 33),
(78, 39). The data set(s) that cannot come from experiment
and is (are) incorrectly recorded, is (are) (IITJEE 2009)
(a) (42, 56) (b) (48, 48)
(c) (66, 33) (d) (78, 39)
36. A ray OP of monochromatic light is incident on the face
AB of prism ABCD near vertex B at an incident angle of
60° (see figure). If the refractive index of the material of the
prism is 3 , which of the following is(are) correct ?
(IIT 2010)
If the origin of the coordinate system is taken to be at the
centre of the lens, the coordinates (in cm) of the point (x, B
O
y) at which the images is formed are (IITJEE 2016) 60° C
(a) (125/3, 25/ 3 ) (b) (25, 25) P 135°
(c) (50 – 25, 25) (d) (25, 25 3 )
34. A wire is bent in the shape of a right angled triangle and 90° 75°
is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length f, as A D
shown in the figure. Which of the figures shown in the
four options qualitatively represent(s) the shape of the (a) The ray gets totally internally reflected at face CD
image of the bent wire ? (These figures are not to scale.) (b) The ray comes out through face AD
(c) The angle between the incident ray and the emergent
ray is 90°
(IIT JEE 2018) (d) The angle between the incident ray and the emergent
ray is 120°.
37. A transparent thin film of uniform thickness and refractive
index n1 = 1.4 is coated on the convex spherical surface of
radius R at one end of a long solid glass cylinder of
refractive index n2 = 1.5, as shown in the figure. Rays of
light parallel to the axis of the cylinder traversing through
the film from air to galss get focused at distance f1 from the
film, while rays of light traversing from glass to air get
focused at distance f2 from the film. Then (2014)

(a) | f1 | = 3 R (b) | f1 | = 2.8 R

(c) | f2 | = 2R (d) | f2 | = 1.4R
RAY OPTICS 76

41. For an isosceles prism of angles A and refractive index ,

38. For two structure namely S1 with n1  45 / 4 and n2 = 3/
it is found that the angle of minimum deviation m  A.
2 and S2 with n1 = 8/5 and n2 = 7/5 and taking the refractive
index of water to be 4/3 and that of air to be 1, the correct Which of the following options is/are correct? (2017)
option(s) is (are). (IITJEE 2015) (a) For the angle of incidence i1 = A, the ray inside the
(a) NA of S1 immersed in water is the same as that of S2 prism is parallel to the base of the prism.

16 (b) At minimum deviation, the incident angle i1 and the

immersed in liquid of refractive index . refracting angle r1 at the first refracting surface are related
3 15
 ii 
6 by r1   
(b) NA of S1 immersed in liquid of refractive index is 2
15
the same as that of S2 immersed in water. (c) For this prism, the emergent ray at the second surface
(c) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that of S2 immersed will be tangential to the surface when the angle of
incidence at the first surface is
4
in liquid of refractive index .
15  A 
i1  sin 1 sin A 4 cos 2  1  cos A 
(d) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that of S2 placed  2 
in water.
(d) For this prism, the refractive index  and the angle
39. A plano-convex lens is made of a material of refractive
index n. When a small object is placed 30 cm away in front 1 
prism A are related as A  cos1  
of the curved surface of the lens, an image of double the 2 2
size of the object is produced. Due to reflection from the
convex surface of the lens, another faint image is observed 42. A thin convex lens is made of two materials with refractive
at a distance of 10 cm away from the lens. Which of the indices n1 and n2, as shown in figure. The radius of
following statement(s) is(are) true? (2016) curvature of the left and right spherical surfaces are equal.
(a) The refractive index of the lens is 2.5 f is the focal length of the lens when n1 = n2 = n. The focal
(b) The radius of curvature of the convex surface is 45 cm
length is f +  f when n1 = n and n2 = n + n. Assuming n 
(c) The faint image is erect and real
(n – 1) and (1 < n < 2), the correct statement(s) is/are
(d) The focal length of the lens is 20 cm
(2019/Shift -1)
40. A transparent slab of thickness d has a refractive index
n(z) that increases with z. Here z is the vertical distance
inside the slab, measured from the top. The slab is placed
between two media with uniform refractive indices n1 and
n2 (>n1), as shown in the figure. A ray of light is incident
with angle i from medium 1 and emerges in medium 2
with refraction angle f with a lateral displacement l.

n f
(a) If  0 then 0
n f
(b) For n = 1.5,  n = 10–3 and f = 20cm, the value of | f |
will be 0.02 cm (round off to 2nd decimal place).
f n
(c) 
f n
Which of the following statement(s) is (are) true?(2016)
f n
(a) l is dependent on n(z) (d) The relation between and remains unchanged
f n
(b) l is independent of n2
if both the convex surfaces are replaced by concave
(c) n1 sin i = (n2 – n1) sin f
surfaces of the same radius of curvature.
(d) n1 sin i = n2 sin f
RAY OPTICS 77

43. Three glass cylinders of equal height H=30 cm and same (a) Determine the angle of the flint glass prism.
refractive index n=1.5 are placed on a horizontal surface (b) Calculate the net dispersion of the combined system.
as shown in figure. CylinderI has a flat top, cylinder II has 46. A thin biconvex lens of refractive index 3/2 is placed on a
horizontal plane mirror as shown in the figure. The space
a convex top and cylinder III has a concave top. The radii
between the lens and the mirror is then filled with water of
of curvature of the two curved tops are same (R=3m). If refractive index 4/3. It is found that when a point object is
H1, H2 and H3 are the apparent depths of a point X on the placed 15 cm above the lens on its principal axis, the object
coincides with its own image. On repeating with another
bottom of the three cylinders, respectively, the correct
liquid, the object and the image again coincide at a distance
statement(s) is/are: 25 cm from the lens. Calculate the refractive index of the
(2019/Shift -2) liquid. (IITJEE 2001)

47. A prism of refracting angle 30° is coated with a thin film of

(1) H2> H1 transparent material of refractive index 2.2 on face AC of
(2) H3>H1 the prism. A light of wavelength 6600Å is incident on face
AB such that angle of incidence is 60°. Find
(3) 0.8 cm < (H2 - H1) < 0.9 cm
(IITJEE 2003)
(4) H2> H3

Integer Type A
44. A convex lens of focal length 15 cm and a concave mirror
of focal length 30 cm are kept with their optic axis PQ and 30°
60°
RS parallel but separated in vertical direction by 0.6 cm as
shown. The distance between the lens and mirror is 30 cm. 3
An upright object AB of height 1.2 cm is placed on the B
optic axis PQ of the lens at a distance of 20 cm from the C
lens. If A’ B’ is the image after refraction from the lens and
the reflection from the mirror, find the distance of A’ B’ (a) the angle of emergence and
from the pole of the mirror and obtain its magnification.
Also locate positions of A’ and B’ with respect to the optic (b) the minimum value of thickness of the coated film on
axis RS. (IITJEE 2000) the face AC for which the light emerging from the face has
maximum intensity. [Given refractive index of the material
of the prism is 3]
A
48. In the figure, light is incident on a thin lens as shown. The
P radius of curvature for both the surfaces is R. Determine
Q
0.6 cm B
S the focal length of this system. (IITJEE 2003)
R

30 cm 20 cm

45. The refractive indices of the crown glass for blue and red
light are 1.51 and 1.49 respectively and those of the flint
glass are 1.77 and 1.73 respectively. An isosceles prism of
angle 6° is made of crown glass. A beam of white light is
incident at a small angle on this prism. The other flint
glass isosceles prism is combined with the crown glass
prism such that there is no deviation of the incident light.
(IITJEE 2001)
RAY OPTICS 78

49. Figure shows an irregular block of material of refractive 53. Consider a concave mirror and a convex lens (refractive
index 2 . A ray of light strikes the face AB as shown in index = 1.5) of focal length 10 cm each, separated by a
distance of 50 cm in air (refractive index = 1) as shown in
the figure. After refraction it is incident on a spherical
the figure. An object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from
surface CD of radius of curvature 0.4 m and enters a medium
the mirror. Its erect image formed by this combination has
of refractive index 1.514 to meet PQ at E. Find the distance
magnification M1. When the set up is kept in a medium of
OE upto two places of decimal. (IITJEE 2004)
7
refractive index the magnification becomes M2. The
6
B C
M2
45° magnitude M is (IITJEE 2015)
O E 1
P Q

60°
A D

50. An object is approaching a thin convex lens of focal length

0.3 m with a speed of 0.01 m/s. Find the magnitudes of the
rates of change of position and lateral magnification of
image when the object is at a distance of 0.4 m from the
lens. (IITJEE 2004)
51. AB and CD are two slabs. The medium between the slabs
has refractive index 2. Find the minimum angle of incidence 54. The monochromatic beam of light is incident at 60° on
of Q, so that the ray is totally reflected by both the slabs. one face of an equilateral prims of refractive index n and
(IITJEE 2005) emerges from the opposite face making an angle (n) with
the normal (see the figure). For n = 3 the value of  is
A Q B d
60° and  m. The value of m is (IITJEE 2015)
dn

P
C D

52. A ray of light is incident on a prism ABC of refractive index

3 as shown in figure. (IITJEE 2005)

B D
55. A monochromatic light is travelling in a medium of
60° 60° refractive index n = 1.6. It enters a stack of glass layers
from the bottom side at an angle   30 . The interfaces
60°
of the glass layers are parallel to each other. The refractive
A C E indices of different glass layers are monotonically
decreasing as nm = n – mn, where nm is the refractive
(a) Find the angle of incidence for which the deviation of index of the mth slab and n  0.1 (see the figure). The
light ray by the prism ABC is minimum. ray is refracted out parallel to the interface between the
(b) By what angle the second identical prism must be (m – 1) the mth slabs from the right side of the stack. What
rotated, so that the final ray suffers net minimum is the value of m? (IITJEE 2017)
deviation.
RAY OPTICS 79

56. A planar structure of length L and width W is made of two

different optical media of refractive indices n1 = 1.5 and n2 =
1.44 as shown in figure. If L >> W, a ray entering from end
AB will emerge from end CD only if the total internal
reflection condition is met inside the structure. For L = 9.6
m, if the incident angle  is varied, the maximum time taken 59. A large square container with thin transparent vertical walls
–9
by a ray to exit the plane CD is t × 10 s, where t is _____ . 4
8 and filled with water (refractive index ) is kept on a
[Speed of light c = 3 × 10 m/s] 3
(2019/Shift -1) horizontal table. A student holds a thin straight wire vertically
inside the water 12 cm from one of its corners, as shown
schematically in the figure. Looking at the wire from this
corner, another student sees two images of the wire, located
symmetrically on each side of the line of sight as shown.
The separation (in cm) between these images is … .
(2020/Shift -2)

57. An optical bench has 1.5 m long scale having four equal
divisions in each cm. While measuring the focal length of a
convex lens, the lens is kept at 75 cm mark of the scale and
the object pin is kept at 45 cm mark. The image of the object
pin on the other side of the lens overlaps with image pin
that is kept at 135 cm mark. In this experiment, the percentage
error in the measurement of the focal length of the lens is Assertion/Reason
____. 60. Statement–1 : The formula connecting u, v and f for a
spherical mirror is valid only for mirrors whose sizes are
(2019/Shift -2)
very small compared to their radii of curvature.
58. A perfectly reflecting mirror of mass M mounted on a spring
Statement–2: Laws of reflection are strictly valid for plane
constitutes a spring–mass system of angular frequency  surfaces, but not for large spherical surfaces.
4M (IITJEE 2007)
such that = 1024 m-2 with h as Planck’s constant. N
h (a) If Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true ; Statement–2
–6
photons of wavelength  = 8 × 10 mstrike the mirror is the correct explanation for Statement–1.
simultaneously at normal incidence such that the mirror gets (b) If Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true ; Statement–2
is not a correct explanation for Statement–1.
displaced by 1m. If the value of N is x × 1012, then the value
(c) If Statement–1 is true ; Statement–2 is false.
of x is _____. [Consider the spring as massless]
(d) If Statement–1 is false ; Statement–2 is true.
(2019/Shift -2)
RAY OPTICS 80

Match the Column

61. An optical component and an object S placed along its
optic axis are given in Column–I. The distance between the
object and the component can be varied. The properties (C) 2 = 3 (r)
of images are given in Column–II. Match all the properties
of images from Column–II with the appropriate
components given in Column–I. (IITJEE 2008)
Column – I Column – II
(D) 2 > 3 (s)
ll l l
l l l l l ll l l l l l l l l l

S
(A) (P) Real image

(t)

S
(B) (Q) Virtual image
63. A right angled prism of refractive index 1 is placed in a
rectangular block of refractive index 2, which is surrounded
by a medium of refractive index 3, as shown in the figure, A
ray of light ‘e’ enters the rectangular block at normal
S incidence. Depending upon the relationships between 1,
(C) (R) Magnified image 2 and 3, it takes one of the four possible paths ‘ef’, ‘eg’,
‘eh’, or ‘ei’.

S
(D) (S) Image at infinity

62. Two transparent media of refractive indices m1 and m3 have

a solid lens shaped transparent material of refractive index
m2 between them as shown in figures in Column-II. A ray
traversing these media is also shown in the figures. In
Column-I different relationships between m1, m2 and m3 Match the paths in List I with conditions of refractive indices
are given. Match them to the ray diagram shown in in List II and select the correct answer using the codes
Column-II. (2010) given below the lists. (IITJEE 2013)
Column-I Column-II List I List II
(P) e  f 1. 1  2  2
(Q) e  g 2. 2 > 1 and 2 > 3
(A) 1 < 2 (p) (R) e  h 3. 1 = 2
(S) e  i 4. 2 < 1 < 2 2 and 2 > 3
Codes
P Q R S
(a) 2 3 1 4
(B) 1 > 2 (q) (b) 1 2 4 3
(c) 4 1 2 3
(d) 2 3 4 1
RAY OPTICS 81

64. Four combinations of two thin lenses are given in List I. Fill In the blanks
The radius of curvature of all curved surfaces is r and the 65. Sunlight of intensity 1.3 kW m–2 is incident normally on a
refractive index of all the lenses is 1.5. Match lens thin convex lens of focal length 20 cm. Ignore the energy
combinations in List I with their focal length in List II and loss of light due to the lens and assume that the lens
select the correct answer using the code given below the aperture size is much smaller than its focal length. The
lists. (2014) average intensity of light, kW m–2, at a distance 22 cm
List I List II from the lens on the other side is _________.
(IIT JEE 2018)
P. 1. 2r

Q. 2. r/2

R. 3. –r

S. 4. r

(a) P -1, Q-2, R-3, S-4 (b) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1
(c) P-4, Q-1, R-2, S-3 (d) P-2, Q-1, R-3, S-4
RAY OPTICS 82

RAY OPTICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
 02
WAVE OPTICS
 Chapter 02
84

WAVE OPTICS

1. WAVEFRONT 1.4 Ray of light

A source of light sends out disturbance in all directions. An arrow drawn normal to the wavefront and pointing
in the direction of propagation of disturbance represents a
In a homogeneous medium, the disturbance reaches all those
ray of light. A ray of light is the path along which light travels.
particles of the medium in phase, which are located at the In figures (a,b,c) as shown above, thick arrows represent the
same distance from the source of light and hence at any instant, rays of light.
all such particles must be vibrating in phase with each other. Since the ray of light is normal to the wavefront, it is sometimes called
The locus of all the particles of medium, which at any instant as the wave normal.
are vibrating in the same phase, is called the wavefront.
Key points
Depending upon the shape of the source of light, wavefront The phase difference between any two points on a
can be of the following types : wavefront is zero.
Characterists of wavefront :
2. HUYGENS’S PRINCIPLE
1. Phase difference between particles on wavefront are
zero. Huygen’s principle is a geometrical construction, which is used
to determine the new position of a wavefront at a later time from
2. Normal to wavefront represent ray of light. its given position at any instant. In order words, the principle
3. In isotropic medium, a point source gives rise to spherical gives a method to know as to how light spreads out in the medium.
wavefront. Huygen’s principle is based on the following assumptions :
4. It always travels in forward direction 1. Each point on the given or primary wavefront acts as a source
of secondary wavelets, sending out disturbance in all directions
1.1 Spherical wavefront in a similar manner as the original source of light does.
A spherical wavefront is produced by a point source of light. It is 2. The new position of the wavefront at any instant (called
secondary wavefront) is the envelope of the secondary
because, the locus of all such points, which are equidistant from
wavelets at that instant.
the point source, is a sphere as shown in figure (a).
The above two assumptions are known as Huygen’s
principle or Huygens’construction.

A' A'' A A'

A
S
A'' a
S a

b b

(a) (b) (c) c c

d d
1.2 Cylindrical wavefront
When the source of light is linear in shape (such as a e
e
slit), a cylindrical wavefront is produced. It is because, all the B''
points, which are equidistant from the linear source, lie on the B
B' B'' B B'
surface of a cylinder as shown in figure (b).
Note :
1.3 Plane wavefront Phenomenon explained by these theory are :
A small part of a spherical or a cylindrical wavefront (1) Reflection
originating from a distant source will appear plane and hence (2) Refraction
it is called a plane wavefront as shown in figure (c). (3) Interference
(4) Polarisation

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 85

Key points 3.3 Resultant amplitude and intensity

Huygen’s principle is simply a geometrical construction
If suppose we have two waves y1 = a1 sin t & y2 = a2 sin
to find the position of wavefront at a later time.
(t + ); where a1, a2 = Individual amplitudes,  = Phase
3. PRINCIPLE OF SUPER POSITION difference between the waves at an instant when they
are meeting at point. I1, I2 = Intensities of individual
When two or more than two waves superimpose over waves
each other at a common particle of the medium then the resultant Resultant amplitude : After superimposition of the
displacement (y) of the particle is equal to the vector sum of given waves resultant amplitude (or the amplitude of
the displacements (y1 and y2) produced by individual waves.
   resultant wave) is given by A  a 12  a 22  2a 1a 2 cos 
i.e. y  y1  y 2
3.1 Graphical view For the interfering waves y1 = a1 sin t and y2 = a2 cos
t, if phase difference between them is 90o. So resultant
Resultant amplitude A  a 12  a 22
1
2
Resultant intensity : As we know intensity 
y1 + y2 = y = y1+y2
(Amplitude)2  I1  ka 12 , I 2  ka 22 and I = kA2 (k is a
Waves are meeting at a point
in same phase proportionality constant). Hence from the formula of
resultant amplitude, we get the following formula of
resultant intensity I  I1  I2  2 I1 I2 cos 

Note :
2
(ii) (1) I max   I1  I 2  , when   0

2
(2) I min   I1  I 2  , when    rad
3.2 Phase/Phase difference/Path difference/Time difference
(i) Phase : The argument of sine or cosine in the expression The term 2 I1 I 2 cos  is called interference term. For
for displacement of a wave is defined as the phase. For incoherent interference this term is zero so resultant
displacement y = a sin  t ; term  t = phase or intensity I = I1 + I2.
instantaneous phase
3.4 Coherent sources
(ii) Phase difference () : The difference between the phases
of two waves at a point is called phase difference i.e. if The sources of light which emits continuous light waves
y1 = a1 sin t and y2 = a2 sin (t + ) so phase difference =  of the same wavelength, same frequency and in same phase
(iii) Path difference (x) : The difference in path length’s of or having a constant phase difference are called coherent
two waves meeting at a point is called path difference sources. e.g : A laser light has high degree of cohernce.
 4. INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT
between the waves at that point. Also x  
2 When two waves of exactly same frequency (coming from
(iv) Time difference (T.D.) : Difference in time between the two coherent sources) travels in a medium, in the same
T direction simultaneously then due to their superposition,
waves meeting at a point is T.D.   at some points intensity of light is maximum while at some
2
other points intensity is minimum. This phenomenon is
Important : called Interference of light. In general, iterference is the
effect after super position of coherent waves.
Phase differe path difference Time difference
 
2  T

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 86

4.1 Types of Interference

Constructive interference Destructive interference

(i) When the waves meet at point with same phase, (i) When the waves meet at point with opposite phase,
constructive interference is obtained at that point destructive interference is obtained at that point (i.e.
(i.e. maximum light) minimum light)
(ii) Phase difference between the waves at the point of (ii)  = 180° or (2n – 1) ; n = 1,2, ....
observation   0 or 2n, n  0,1, 2,..... or (2n + 1) ; n = 0, 1,2, .....
(iii) Path difference between the waves at the point of 
observation  = n (i.e. integral multiple of ) (iii)   2n  1 (i.e. odd multiple of /2)
2
(iv) Resultant amplitude at the point of observation iv) Resultant amplitude at the point of observation will be
will be maximum minimum
A max  a1  a 2 Amin = a1 – a2
If a1 = a 2 = a 0  Amax = 2a0 If a1 = a2  Amin = 0
(v) Resultant intensity at the point of observation (v) Resultant intensity at the point of observation will be
will be maximum minimum

I max  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 I max   I1  I 2 
2
Imax  I1  I2  2 I1 I 2 I max   I1  I 2 
2

If I1  I2  I0  Imax  4I0 If I1 = I2 = I0  Imin = 0

4.2 Resultant intensity due to two identical waves  If two waves having equal intensity (I1 = I2 = I0) meets
For two coherent sources the resultant intensity is at two locations P and Q with path difference 1 and 2
respectively then the ratio of resultant intensity at point
given by I  I1  I 2  2 I1I 2 cos 
1   
For identical source I1 = I2 = I0 cos 2 cos 2  1 
I 2    
2  P and Q will be P 
IQ  
 I  I0  I0  2 I0 I0 cos   4 I0 cos
2 cos 2 2 cos 2  2 
2   
2 
[1 + cos  2 cos ]
2
5. YOUNG’S DOUBLE SLIT EXPERIMENT (YDSE)
Note:-
Monochromatic light (single wavelength) falls on two
 In interference, redistribution of energy takes place in
narrow slits S1 and S2 which are very close together
the form of maxima and minima.
acts as two coherent sources, when waves coming from
I max  I min two coherent sources (S1, S2) superimposes on each
 Average intensity : I av   I1  I 2  a 12  a 22
2 other, an interference pattern is obtained on the screen.
In YDSE alternate bright and dark bands are obtained
 Ratio of maximum and minimum intensities :
on the screen. These bands are called fringes.
2 2
Imax  I1  I 2   I / I2  1  d = Distance between slits
   
Imin  I1  I 2   I / I 1 
 2  D = Distance between slits and screen
2 2
 a  a   a / a 1  = Wavelength of monochromatic light emitted from
 1 2   1 2  source
 a1  a 2   a1 / a 2  1 
 I max 
 1
I1 a  I 
also  1   min 
I 2 a 2  I max
1 
 I 
 min 

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 87

Note :- If the slits are vertical, the path difference (x) is

Screen d sin , so as  increases,  also increases. But if slits
4 Dark
3 Bright are horizontal path difference is d cos  , so as 
3 Dark
2 Bright increases, x decreases.
2 Dark
S1 1 Bright
1 Dark P
S d Central bright fringe
1 Dark (or central maxima
S2 1 Bright S1
2 Dark
2 Bright
3 Dark
3 Bright d C
4 Dark M
D S2 .. for vertical slits

(1) Central fringe is always bright, because at central

D
position = 0° or = 0
(2) The fringe pattern obtained due to a slit is more bright P
than that due to a point source.
(3) If the slit widths are unequal, the minima will not be C ....for horizontal slits
co mplete dark. Fo r very large width unifo rm S1 S2
d
illumination occurs.
(4) If one slit is illuminated with red light and the other slit 5.2 More about fringes
is illuminated with blue light, no interference pattern is (i) All fringes are of equal width. Width of each fringe is
observed on the screen.
D 
(5) If the two coherent sources consist of object and it’s  and angular fringe width  
d d
reflected image, the central fringe is dark instead of
bright one. (ii) If the whole YDSE set up is taken in another medium then
 changes so  changes
5.1 Path difference
a  3
Path difference between the interfering waves meeting e.g. in water  w   w  a  a
w w 4
yd
at a point P on the screen is given by x   d sin 
D 1
(iii) Fringe width   i.e. with increase in separation between
where x is the position of point P from central maxima. d
P
the sources,  decreases.
(iv) Position of n th bright fringe from central maxima
S1 y n D
xn   n ; n = 0, 1, 2, ....
d
d
M
C (v) Position of n th dark fringe from central maxima
S2
xn 
2n  1D  2n  1 ; n = 1, 2, 3....
Screen 2d 2
D
(vi) In YDSE, if n1 fringes are visible in a field of view with
For maxima at P : x  n; light of wavelength 1, while n2 with light of wavelength
where n = 0,  1,  2, ……. 2 in the same field, then n11 = n22 .

2n  1 (vii) When waves from two slits interfere in space, shape of
and For minima at P : x ;
2 frings is hyperbolic with foci as s1 and s 2 .
where n =  1,  2, ……. (viii) If an additional phase difference of  is created in one of
the wave then the central fringe becomes dark.

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 88

5.3 Shifting of fringe pattern in YDSE

If a transparent thin film of mica or glass is put in the Air

path of one of the waves, then the whole fringe pattern
gets shifted.
Air
If film is put in the path of upper wave, fringe pattern Soap bubble in air
shifts upward and if film is placed in the path of lower
wave, pattern shift downward. 6.1 Thin films
t In thin films interference takes place between the waves
P
reflected from it’s two surfaces and waves refracted through it.
S1

d C
M
S2

Screen
D

D
Fringe shift =   1 t     1 t
d 
Interference in reflected Interference in transmitted
 Additional path difference = ( – 1)t
light light
2
 Phase difference     1 t Condition of constructive Condition of constructive

interference (maximum interference (maximum

If shift is equivalent to n fringes then n

  1 t intensity) intensity)
  
Where n is the no. of fringes shifted. Hence, thiickness   2 t cos r  2n  1   2 t cos r  2n 
2 2
n For normal incidence r = 0 For normal incidence
of film introduced if n is known is t 
  1 
so 2t  2n  1 2t = n
 Shift is independent of the order of fringe (i.e. 2
shift of zero order maxima = shift of nth order maxima.
Condition of destructive Condition of destructive
 Shift is independent of wavelength. interference interference
(minimum intensity) (minimum intensity)
6. ILLUSTRATIONS OF INTERFERENCE  
  2 t cos r  2n    2 t cos r  2n  1
Interference effects are commonly observed in thin films when 2 2
their thickness is comparable to wavelength of incident light (If it For normal incidence 2t = n For normal incidence
is too thin as compared to wavelength of light it appears dark and 
if it is too thick, this will result in uniform illumination of film). Thin 2t = (2n ± 1)
2
layer of oil on water surface and soap bubbles shows various
colours in white light due to interference of waves reflected from Note:-
the two surfaces of the film.
The Thickness of the film for interference in visible light
Air is of the order of 10,000 Å.
Oil
Uses of interference effect :

(1) To determine wavelength of light, refractive index of

transparent sheet.
Oil film on water surface

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 89

(2) To test flatness of plane surfaces.

Shadow
(3) To design optical filters that allows a narrow band of
wavelength to pass through it.
Light
7. DOPPLER’S EFFECT IN LIGHT
The phenomenon of apparent change in frequency (or
wavelength) of the light due to relative motion between the source Aperture
of light and the observer is called Doppler’s effect.
According to special theory of relativity
Light
v' 1 v / c

v 1  v2 / c2 Shadow

If v = actual frequency, v’ =Apparent frequency, v = speed of

source w.r.t stationary observer, c = speed of light
Obstacle
Source of light moves Source of light moves
towards the stationary away from the stationary
observer (v << c) observer (v << c) 8.1 Types of diffraction
(i) Apparent frequency (i) Apparent frequency The diffraction phenomenon is divided into two types
 v  v
  v 1   and   v 1   and Fresnel diffraction Fraunhofer diffraction
 c  c
Apparent wavelength Apparent wavelength (i) If either source or screen (i) In this case both source
or both are at finite distances and screen are effectively
 v  v from the diffracting device at infinite distance from
   1      1  
 c  c (obstacle or aperture), the the diffracting device.
diffraction is called Fresnel
(ii) Doppler’s shift : Apparent (ii) Doppler’s shift : Apparent
type.
wavelength < actual wavelength > actual
(ii) Common examples : (ii) Common examples :
wavelength, So spectrum of wavelength, So spectrum Diffraction at a straight edge Diffraction at single slit,
the radiation from the source of the radiation from the narrow wire or small opaque double slit and diffraction
of light shifts towards the source of light shifts disc etc. grating.

violet end of spectrum. This towards the red end of

is called violet shift in
Doppler’s spectrum. This is called S

v Source Source
shift,   . red shift in Doppler’s shift Screen
at
c Screen
Slit Slit
v (iii) Wave is spherical/cylindrical (iii) Wave front is plane and is
  .
c easier to observe

8. DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT
It is the phenomenon of bending of light around the corners
of an obstacle/aperture of the size of the wavelength of light. 8.2 Diffraction of light at a single slit

In case of diffraction at a single slit, we get a central bright

band with alternate bright (maxima) and dark (minima) bands
of decreasing intensity as shown

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 90

8.3 Comparison between interference and diffraction

P Interference Diffraction
x
Results due to the superposition Results due to the super-
S1 of waves from two coherent position of wavelets from
source. different parts of same
d wave front. (single coherent
source)
S2
All fringes are of same width All secondary fringes are of
Screen
D
D  same width but the central
d
Slit
maximum is of double the
width
l D
 0  2  2
d

All fringes are of same intensity Intensity decreases as the

order of maximum increases.
O
Intensity of all minimum may be Intensity of minima is not
zero. Positions of n th maxima zero. Positions of n th
2 D
(i) Width of central maxima  0  and angular width and minima secondary maxima and
d minima
2 nD , D
 X n Bright   X n Bright   2n  1 ,
d d d
(ii) Minima occurs at a point on either side of the central D nD
X n Dark   2n  1 X n Dark  
maxima, such that the path difference between the d d
waves from the two ends of the aperture is given by
 = n; where n = 1, 2, 3 ..... Path difference for n th maxima for n th secondary maxima
i.e. d sin  = n; 
 = n   2n  1
2
n
 sin  
d Path difference for n th minima Path difference for n th
(iii) The secondary maxima occurs, where the path  = (2n – 1) minima  = n
difference between the waves from the two ends of the
8.4 Diffraction and optical instruments

aperture is given by   2n  1 ; where n = 1, 2, 3 ..... The objective lens of optical instrument like telescope
2
or microscope etc. acts like a circular aperture. Due to
 diffraction of light at a circular aperture, a converging lens
i.e. d sin   2n  1 cannot form a point image of an object rather it produces a
2
brighter disc known as Airy disc surrounded by alternate dark
2n  1 and bright concentric rings.
 sin  
2d

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 91

By Rayleigh’s criterion
(iii) Light can be polarised by transmitting through certain
1.22  crystals such as tourmaline or polaroids.
The angular half width of Airy disc =   (where
D
9. 3 Polarization by Scattering
D = aperture of lens)
When a beam of white light is passed through a medium
Note:- containing particles whose size is of the order of
The lateral width of the image  f (where f = focal wavelength of light, then the beam gets scattered.
length of the lens) When the scattred light is seen in a direction
Diffraction of light limits the ability of optical perpendicular to the direction of incidence, it is found
instruments to form clear images of objects when they to be plane polarized (as detected by the analyser).
are close to each other. The phenomenon is called polarization by scattering.

9. POLARISATION OF LIGHT
Light propagates as transverse EM waves. The
magnitude of electric field is much larger as compared
to magnitude of magnetic field. We generally prefer to
describe light as electric field oscillations.
Note : Transeverse nature of light is demonstrated by
polarisation

9.1 Unpolarised light

The light having electric field oscillations in all
directions in the plane perpendicular to the direction
9.4 Polarization of Light by Reflection
of propagation is called Unpolarised light. The
oscillation may be resolved into horizontal and vertical When unpolarized light is reflected from a surface, the
component. reflected light may be completely polarised, partially
polarized or unpolarized. This would depend on the
angle of incidence.
The angle of incidence at which the reflected light is
completely plane polarized is called polarizing angle or
Direction of
propagation
Brewster’s angle. (ip)

9.2 Polarised light

The light having oscillations only in one plane is called
Polarised or plane polarised light.
(i) The plane in which oscillation occurs in the polarised light
The angle of polarisation is related with refractive index
is called plane of oscillation.
is tan i p  
(ii) The plane perpendicular to the plane of oscillation is called
plane of polarisation.

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 92
9.5 Polaroids
It is a device used to produce the plane polarised light. It Intensity = I0
is based on the principle of selective absorption and is A
P Amplitude = A0
more effective than the tourmaline crystal.
or
It is a thin film of ultramicroscopic crystals of quinine
idosulphate with their optic axis parallel to each other.
I1
Polaroid Intensity = I

Amplitude = A

Plane polarised light

(i) Polaroids allow the light oscillations parallel to the I = I0 cos2  and A 2  A 20 cos 2  A = A0 cos 
transmission axis pass through them. If  = 0°, I = I0, A = A0,
(ii) The crystal or polaroid on which unpolarised light is
If  = 45°, I =I0/2, A  A 0 / 2
incident is called polariser. Crystal or polaroid on which
polarised light is incident is called analyser. If  = 90°, I = 0, A = 0
(ii) If Ii = Intensity of unpolarised light.
P A
Ii
So I 0  i.e. if an unpolarised light is converted into
2
plane polarised light (say by passing it through a
polaroid or a Nicol-prism), its intensity becomes half
Ordinary light Polarised light Polarised light
Ii
Transmission axes of the polariser and analyser are parallel to each and I  cos 2 
other, so whole of the polarised light passes through analyser 2
Note:-
P A
Percentage of polarisation 
I max  I min  100
No light
I max  I min 

Ordinary light Polarised light 9.7 Brewster’s law

Transmission axis of the analyser is perpendicular to the
polariser, hence no light passes through the analyser
Brewster discovered that when a beam of unpolarised
light is reflected from a transparent medium (refractive index =
Note:- ), the reflected light is completely plane polarised at a certain
angle of incidence (called the angle of polarisation p).
When unpolarised light is incident on the polariser, the
intensity of the transmitted polarised light is half the Also  = tan p Brewster’s law
intensity of unpolarised light. (i) For i < p or i > p
(iii) Main uses of polaroids are in wind shields of automobiles,
Unpolarised Plane polarised
sun glassess etc. They reduce head light glare of cares light light
and improve colour contrast in old paintings. They are
also used in three dimensional motion pictures and in optical
stress analysis.
9.6 Malus law Partial
polarised
This law states that the intensity of the polarised light light
transmitted through the analyser varies as the square
Polarisation by reflection
of the cosine of the angle between the plane of
transmission of the analyser and the plane of the
polariser.

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 93

Both reflected and refracted rays becomes partially 11.1 Resolving power of Microscope
polarised
2  sin 
(ii) For glass  P  57 , for water  P  53 R. P. of microscope 


10. VALIDITY OF RAY-OPTICS

When a parallel beam of light travels upto distances as
large as few metres it broadens by diffraction of light
travels.

10.1 Fresnel Distance

Fresnel distance is the minimum distance a beam of

light can travel before its deviation from straight line
path becomes significant/noticeable. Resolving power of microscope is the inverse of distance
between two objects that can be just resolved
a2
ZF  . here , a is aperture size 11.2 Resolving power of Telescope


Since wavelength of light is very small, deviation is 1 D

R.P. of telescope  
very small and light can be assumed as travelling in a d 1.22 
straight line.
where D is aperture of telescope.
Hence we can ignore broadening of beam by diffraction
upto distances as large as a few meters, i.e., we can
assume that light travels along straight lines.

Hence Ray optics can be taken as a limiting case of

waveoptics.

11. RESOLVING POWER

When two point objects are close to each other their

images of diffraction patterns are also close and overlap Too close objects such as binary stars, subtend very small
each other. angles on the telescope. To resolve them we need very
large apertuses. we use Rayligh’s criterion to determine
The minimum distance between two objects which can the resolving power of telescope as obtained above.
be seen seperately by the optical instrument is called
limit of resolution of the instrument.

1
Resolving Power (R.P.) =
Limit of Revolution

SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 94

SOLVED EXAMPLES

Example - 1

 '
Laser light of wavelength 630 nm incident on a pair of slits n
produces an interference pattern in which bright fringes
are separated by 8.1 mm. A second light produces an D '
New fringe width,  '  ...(2)
interference pattern in which the fringes are separated by d
7.2 mm. Calculate the wavelength of the second light.
Dividing (2) by (1), we get
d
Sol. Fringe width     for same D and d ' '  / n 1
d    
   n

1 1 2 7.2 mm
   2  1  × 630 nm = 560 nm 
 2 2  8.1mm  ' 
1 n
Here  = 2.0 mm
Example - 2
2.0
The distance between two slits in Young’s interference  '  mm = 1.5 mm
1.33
experiment is 0.03 cm. The fourth bright fringe is obtained
at a distance of 1 cm from central fringe on a screen placed Example - 4
at a distance of 1.5 m from slits. Calculate the wavelength
In Young’s double slit experiment, using light of wavelength
of light used.
400 m, interference fringes of width ‘X’ are obtained. The
nD wavelength of light is increased to 600 nm and the
Sol. The distance of nth bright from central fringe is, y n  separation between the slits is halved. If one wants the
d
observed fringe width on the screen to be same in the two
yn .d cases, find the ratio of the distance between the screen
 wavelength  
nD and the plane of interfering sources with the two
–2 –2 arrangements.
Here yn = 1cm = 1 × 10 m, d = 0.03 cm = 0.03 × 10 m,
D = 1.5 m and n = 4 D11 D
Sol. X  or X '  2 2
d1 d2

110    0.03 10   30 10
2 2 7
–7
= 5 × 10 m
 D11 D2  2
4  1.5 6 Given X = X’  
d1 d2
Example - 3
D2 1 d 2
In Young’s experiment, the width of fringes obtained with  .
light of wavelength 6000 Å is 2.0 mm. What will be the D1  2 d1
fringe width if the entire apparatus is immersed in a liquid d1 d 1
of refractive index 1.33. Given 1 = 400 nm, 2 = 600 nm, d2 =  2 
2 d1 2
D
Sol. Fringe width   ...(1)
d D 2  400 nm   1  1
    
D1  600 nm   2  3
When apparatus is immersed in liquid, the wavelength of
light changes while D and d remain unchanged. If ’ is
1
wavelength of light in liquid, then That is, new distance of screen from sources should be
3
of its initial value.
WAVE OPTICS 95

Example - 5
 1  1.0  450 109 –3
Find the ratio of intensities at two points on a screen in y '2   2    m = 4.5 × 10 m = 4.5 mm
 2 0.15  103
Young’s double slit experiment when waves from the two

slits have a path difference of (i) 0 and (ii) . (b) When screen is moved away from the slits, D increases so
4
D
2 2
fringe width   increases.
Sol. Intensity I  a  a  2a1a 2 cos 
1 2
d

Let a1 = a2 = a (say), then Example - 7

2 2 2 2
I = a + a + 2a cos  = 2a (1 + cos ) A slit of width ‘a’ is illuminated by light of wavelength,
700 nm. What will be the value of slit width ‘a’ when
I1 1  cos 1 (a) first minimum falls at an angle of diffraction 30° ?

I 2 1  cos 2
(b) first maximum falls at an angle of diffraction 30° ?
When path difference is 0, phase difference 1 = 0

Sol. (a) For first minimum, sin 1 
 a
When path difference is ,
4

 a
2   sin 1
phase difference 2   
 4 2 –7
Here  = 700 nm = 7.00 × 10 m, 1 = 30°

I1 1  cos 0 1  1 2 7.00  107 7.00  107

    a   14 107
I2 1  cos  1 1  sin 30 0.5
2 –6
= 1.4 ×10 m
Example - 6
3
(b) For first maximum sin  '1 
In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits 0.15 mm 2a
apart are illuminated by monochromatic light of wavelength
450 nm. The screen is 1.0 m away from the slits. 3 3  7.00  107
 a  –6
= 2.1 × 10 m
(a) Find the distance of second (i) bright fringe (ii) dark 2sin  '1 2  sin 30
fringe, from the central maximum. Example - 8
(b) How will the fringe pattern change if the screen is moved A parallel beam of light of wavelength 600 nm is incident
away from the slits. normally on a slit of width ‘a’. If the distance between the
–3 slit and the screen is 0.8 m and the distance of 2nd order
Sol. (a) Given d = 0.15 mm = 0.15 × 10 m
maximum from the centre of the screen is 1.5 mm, calculate
–9
 = 450 nm = 450 × 10 m the width of the slit.
D = 1.0 m –9 –7
Sol. Given  = 600 nm = 600 × 10 m = 6.0 × 10 m, D = 0.8 m,
(i) Distance of second bright maximum from central maximum –3
y2 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m, n = 2, a = ?
n D th
Position of n maximum in diffraction of a single slit
(n = 2) (from relation yn = )
d
 1  D  1  D
yn   n    a  n  
2D 2  1.0  450  109 –3
 2 a  2  yn
y2   m = 6 × 10 = 6 mm
d 0.15 103
 1  6.0  107  0.8
(ii) Distance of second dark fringe from central maximum (n Substituting given values a   2  
 2  1.5  103
 1  D
= 2) [from relation yn =  n   ] 5
 2 d  –4 –3
× 4.0 × 0.8 × 10 m = 0.8 × 10 m = 0.8 mm
2
WAVE OPTICS 96

Example - 9 Sol. If ordinary unpolarised light of intensity I’0 is incident on

Light of wavelength 500 nm falls, from a distant source, on first polaroid (A, say)
a slit 0.50 mm wide. Find the distance between the two dark
I '0
bands, on either side of the central bright band of the Intensity of light transmitted from first polaroid is I0 
2
diffraction pattern observed, on a screen placed 2 m from
the slits. Given angle between transmission axes of two polaroids A
and B is initially 90°.
Sol. The distance between two dark bands on either side of
central bright bands is equal to the total width of bright According to Malus law, intensity of light transmitted from
band. second polaroid (B, say) is
2 2
I = I0 cos  I = I0 cos 90° = 0
2D
0  When one more polaroid (C say) is placed between A and B
a
making an angle of 45° with the transmission axis of either
–9
Given D = 2 m,  = 500 nm = 500 × 10 m, of polaroids, then intensity of light transmitted from A is
–3
a = 0.50 mm = 0.50 × 10 m I '0
IA   I0
2
2  2  500  109 –3
 0  = 4 × 10 m = 4 mm Intensity of light transmitted from C is
0.50  103
2 I0
Example - 10 IC = I0 cos 45° = .
2
10. Light of wavelength 550 nm. is incident as parallel beam on
a slit of width 0.1 mm. Find the angular width and the linear Intensity of light transmitted from polaroid B is
width of the principal maximum in the resulting diffraction
2 I0 1 I0
pattern on a screen kept at a distance of 1.1 m from the slit. IB = IC cos 45° =  
2 2 4
Which of these widths would not change if the screen
were moved to a distance of 2.2 m from the slit ? This means that the intensity becomes one-fourth of
intensity of light is transmitted from first polaroid.
–7
Sol. Given  = 550 nm = 5.50 × 10 m, On further rotating the polaroid C such that if angle between
–3
a = 0.1 mm = 0.1 × 10 m, D = 1.1 m their transmission axes increases, the intensity decreases
and if angle decreases, the intensity increases.
Angular half width of principal maximum,
Example - 12
 5.50  107
 
a 0.1 103 Two polaroids are set in crossed positions. A third polaroid
–3
is placed between the two making an angle  with the pass
= 5.5 × 10 radians axis of the first polaroid. Write the expression of the intensity
–3
Total angular width = 2 = 11 × 10 radians of light transmitted from the second polaroid. In what
Total linear width, orientations will the transmitted intensity be (i) minimum
and (ii) maximum ?
= D × 2
–3
= 1.1 × 11 × 10 m = 12.1 mm Sol. Let intensity of incident unpolarised light on first polaroid
The angular width would not change. be I0.

Example - 11
Two polaroids are placed 90° to each other and the
transmitted intensity is zero. What happens when one more
polaroid is placed between these two bisecting the angle
between them. Take intensity of unpolarised light I0. Intensity of light transmitted through 1st polaroid P1 is
How will the intensity of transmitted light vary on further
I0
rotating the third polaroid ? I1  .
2
WAVE OPTICS 97
Intensity of light transmitted through polaroid P3 is
2 2  2
'    
I   3 3
I 2  0 cos 2 
2
2
Angle between pass-axis of P3 and P2 is (90 – )  I '  4I0 cos 2 (since K = 4I0)
3
 Intensity of light transmitted through polaroid P2 is
2
I  2  1 1
I3  I 2 cos  90      0 cos 2   sin 2 
2  K cos 2  K   K
3  2 4
2 

I0 I Example - 15
  2 cos  sin  2  0 sin 2
8 8
A beam of light consisting of two wavelength 650 nm and
(i) Intensity I3 will be minimum, when 520 nm, is used to obtain interference fringes in a Young’s
sin 2 = 0  = 0° double slit experiment on a screen 1 m away. The separation
between the slits is 1 mm.
(ii) Intensity I3 will be maximum when
(a) Find the distance of the third bright fringe on the screen
sin 2 = 1  = 45°
from the central maximum for wavelength 650 nm.
(b) What is the least distance from the central maximum
Example - 13
when the bright fringes due to both the wavelength
In Young’s double slit experiment the slits are separated by coincide ?
0.28 mm and the screen is placed 1.4 m away. The distance of
4th bright fringe is measured to be 1.2 cm from center of screen. –9
Sol. Given 1 = 650 nm = 650 × 10 m,
Determine the wavelength of light used in this experiment. –9
2 = 520 nm = 520 × 10 m
–3
Sol. Given d = 0.28 mm = 0.28 × 10 m, D = 1.4 m
9
nD1 3 1 650 10
nD (i) yn   y3 
Position of n th bright fringe from central fringe is y n  d 1103
d
–3
–2 = 1.95 × 10 m = 1.95 mm
Here n = 4, y4 = 1.2 cm = 1.2 × 10 m
(ii) For least distance of coincidence of fringes, there must be a
.d 1.2 10   
2
y4 m  0.28 103 m difference of 1 in order of 1 and 2.
 Wavelength   
4D 4 1.4 As 1 > 2. n1 < n2
–7
= 6 × 10 m = 600 nm If n1 = n, then n2 = n + 1

Example - 14   y n 1
  y n 1 
2

In Young’s double slit experiment using monochromatic

light of wavelength , the intensity at a point on the screen nD1  n  1 D 2
 
where path difference is  is K units. What is the intensity d d

 2 520 nm
of light at a point where path difference is .  n1   n  1  2  n 
3 1   2  650  520  nm

 
Sol. Intensity I = 4I0 cos 520
2 or n 4
130
When path difference is , phase difference is 2

2
I = 4I0 cos  = 4I0 = K (given) nD1 4  1 650  109
 Least distance y min  
d 1 103
 –3
When path difference,   , the phase difference = 2.6 × 10 m = 2.6 mm
3
WAVE OPTICS 98

Example - 16 Sol. Condition for minima for diffraction pattern due to a single
slit is
In Young’s double slit experiment the angular width of a
fringe is found to be 0.2° on a screen placed 1 m away. The a sin  = n
wavelength of light used is 600 nm. What will be the angular For first order minimum n = 1
width of the fringe if the entire experimental apparatus is
For small value of ,
4
immersed in water ? Take refractive index of water as . y
3 sin  = tan  =
D

  y
Sol. Angular fringe width    ...(1)  a 
D d D
If apparatus is dipped in water,  changes
D 500  10 9  1 5
 a    104  0.2 mm
  3 y 2.5  10 3 2.5
w   
nw 4 / 3 4
Example - 19
w
 New angular fringe width w  ...(2) What is Brewsters angle for air to glass transition ?
d
Refractive index of glass = 1.5.
 w  w  3 / 4  3
    Sol. From Brewster’s law
   4
n = tan ip
3 3 Given n = 1.5
w     0.2  0.15
4 4 –1 1
Brewster’s angle, ip = tan n = tan (1.5) = 56.3°

Example - 17
Example - 20
In a Young’s double slit experiment the angular width of a
Estimate the distance for which ray optics is good
fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1°. The wavelength
approximation for an aperture of 4 mm and wavelength
of light used is 6000 Å. What is the spacing between the
400 nm.
slits ?
Sol. The distance for which ray optics is good approximation for

Sol. Angular fringe width   an aperture ‘a’ and wavelength ‘’ is called the Fresnel
d
distance, given by
 a2
 Spacing between slits, d  zF 
 
–3 –7
0.1   Given a = 4 mm = 4 × 10 m,  = 400 nm = 4 × 10 m
–7
Here  = 6000 Å = 6 × 10 m,  = 0.1° = radians
180
3 2

 zF 
 4 10   40 m
6 107 6  107  180 4  107
 d  –4
= 3.44 × 10 m
 0.1 /180  0.1 3.14
Example - 21
Example - 18 State two conditions for substained interference of light.
A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on a Also write the expression for the fringe width.
narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed
on a screen 1 metre away. It is observed that the first Sol. Condition for sustained interference :
minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the centre of the
screen, find the width of the slit. (i) The interfering sources must be conherent i.e. source must
have same frequency and constant initial phase.
WAVE OPTICS 99

(ii) Interfering waves must have same or nearly same amplitude, Example - 24
so that there may be contrast between maxima and minima.
In Young’s double slit experiment, explain with reason in
each case, how the interference pattern changes, when
D
Fringe width  
d (i) width of the slits is doubled

where D = distance between slits and screen. (ii) separation between the slits is increased and

d = separation between slits. (iii) screen is moved away from the plane of slits.

 = wavelength of light
D
Sol. The fringe width  
Example - 22 d
Two identical coherent waves, each of intensity I, are
(i) When the width of the slit is doubled; the intensity of
producing an interference pattern. Find the value of the
interfering waves becomes four times, intensity of maxima
resultant intensity at a point of
becomes 16 times i.e., fringes become brighter.
(i) constructive interference and
(ii) destructive interference. 1
(ii)  , when separation between the slits is increased the
d
Sol. Resultant intensity at any point having a phase difference  fringe width decreases i.e., fringes come closer.
is
(iii)  D, when screen is moved away from the plane of the
I R  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 cos  slits, the fringe width increases i.e., fringes become farther
away.
Here, I1 = I2 = I
Example - 25
 I R  I  I  2 I.I cos   2I  2I cos 
How will the angular separation and visibility of fringes in
(i) At a point of constructive interference Young’s double slit experiment change when
(i) screen is moved away from the plane of the slits.
= 2n (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
(ii) width of source slit is increased.
 cos  = 1

 Imax = 2I + 2I = 4I B 
Sol. (i) Angular separation   
D d

(ii) At a point of destructive interference  = (2n – 1) It is independent of D; therefore, angular separation remains
2 unchanged if screen is moved away from the slits. But the
 cos  = 0 D
actual separation between fringes   increases, so
d
 Imin = 2I – 2I = 0 visibility of fringes increases.
Example - 23
(ii) When width of source slit is increased, then the angular
Two slits in Young’s double slit experiment are illuminated fringe width remains unchanged but fringes becomes less
by two different lamps emitting light of same wavelength. and less sharp; so visibility of fringes decreases. If the
Will you observe the interference pattern ? Justify your
s 
answer. condition  is not satisfied, the interference pattern
S d
disappears.
Sol. The light emitted by different lamps is not coherent, so the
waves emitted by source can not produce interference.
Where s is the size of the source and S is the distance of
source from the plane of the two slits.
WAVE OPTICS 100

Example - 26 and lower surface of soap film. The colours of soap solution
Give reasons for the following observations made from earth observed are those which satisfy the condition of maxima in
(i) Sun is visible before the actual sunrise. reflected lihgt.
(ii) Sun looks reddish at sunset. Example - 29

Sol. (i) Sun is visible before the actual sunrise due to refraction. How is a wavefront different from a ray ? Draw the
With increase of height the density and refractive index of geometrical shape of the wavefronts when (i) light diverges
air decreases. When sun is below the horizon, the light rays from a point source, and (ii) light emerges out of a convex
suffer refraction and appear to come from position above lens when a point source is placed at its focus.
the horizon; so sun is visible before the actual sun rise; the Sol. (a) A wavefront is a locus of particles of the medium that
difference of time is about 2 minutes. vibrating in the same phase. It is also a collection of a very
(ii) Sun looks reddish at sun set : At sunset or sunrise, the large number of rays. A ray is always perpendicular to the
sun-light travels a longer path through the atmosphere and surface of a wavefront giving the direction of propagation
reaches directly the observer’s eye. Since the violet and the of a wavefront.
blue light are strongly scattered, the light reaching the
observer is deprived of the violet and blue colour due to (i)
scattering and so it appears red. That is why sunsets and
sunrises appear red. Ray
Example - 27
Draw the diffraction pattern due to a single slit by a Point
monochromatic light. Source Spherical
wave point
Sol.
(ii)

V
F

V
V
V
V
Source at focus Refracted
plane
Convex lens wave front
Incident spherical
wave front
Example - 28
Example - 30
What are coherent sources of light ? Why are coherent Give two differences between interference and diffraction
sources required to produce interference of light ? Give of light. OR
an example of interference in every day life.
State three characteristic features which distinguish
Sol. Coherent Sources : Two sources giving light waves of same between interference pattern due to two coherently
frequency and constant initial phase are called coherent illuminated sources as compared to that observed in a
sources. difrraction pattern due to a single slit.
Necessity of coherent sources to produce interference of Sol. Difference between interference and diffraction
light : Intensity at any point in the region of superposition Interference Diffraction
is I  a12  a 22  2a1a 2 cos  (i) It is due to the super- (i) It is due to the superposition
If the interfering source are not coherent, then the phase position of two waves of secondary wavelets
difference at any point in the region of superposition will go coming from two originating from different
on changing with time. Then we shall get time-averaged coherent sources. parts of the same wavefront.
(ii) The width of the inter- (ii) The width of the diffraction
intensity which is equal to I  a12  a 22 i.e., sum of intensities
ference bands is equal. bands is not the same
of individual waves. This means that there will be no
(iii) The intensity of all (iii) The intensity of central
modifications in intensity in the region of superposition
maxima (fringes) is maximum is maximum and
and hence no interference will be observed.
Example of Interference in Daily Life : The bubbles of same. goes on decreasing rapidly
colourless soap solution appear coloured in while light. This with increase of order of
is due to interference of white light rays reflected from upper maxima.
WAVE OPTICS 101

Example - 31
What are optical fibres ? Mention their one practical
application.

Sol. Optical Fibre : An optical fibre is a device based on total

internal refrection by which a light signal may be
transmitted from one place to another with a negligible
loss of energy. It is a very long and thin pipe of quartz
–4
(n = 1.7) of thickness nearly  10 m coated all around with
a material of refractive index 1.5. A large number of such Example - 33
fibres held together form a light pipe and are used for How can you distinguish between an unpolarised light
communication of light signals. When a light ray is incident and a linearly polarised light beam using a polaroid ?
on one end at a small angle of incidence, it suffers refraction Sol. Distinction of unpolarised and polarised light : The given
from air to quartz and strikes the quartz-coating interface at beam of light is made incident on a polaroid and the polaroid
an angle more than the critical angle and so suffers total is rotated slowly and the intensity of transmitted beam is
internal reflection and strikes the opposite face again at an observed.
angle greater than critical angle and so again suffers total
If there is no variation in intensity, the given beam is
internal reflection. Thus the ray with the fibre suffers multiple
unpolarised, but if the intensity varies with minimum
total internal reflections and finally strikes the other end at
intensity zero, twice in a rotation, the given beam is linearly
an angle less than critical angle for quartz-air interface and
polarised.
emerges in air.
Example - 34
An unpolarised light is incident on the boundary between
two transparent media. State the condition when the
reflected wave is totally plane polarised. Find out the
expression for the angle of incidence in this case.
Sol. Condition : The reflected ray is totally plane polarised,
when reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each
other.

As there is no loss of energy in total internal reflection, the

light signal is transmitted by this device without any
appreciable loss of energy.
Application : Optical fibre is used to transmit light signal at
distant places.
Example - 32
In a single slit experiment, the width of the slit is made
BOC = 90°
double the original width. How does this affect the size
and intensity of the central diffraction band ? Draw a plot If ip is angle of incidence r’ is angle of reflection and r the
of the intensity distribution. angle of refraction, then according to law of reflection
ip = r’
Sol. The angular size of central diffraction band, 2  2  1 . and from figure r’ + 90° + r = 180°
a a
 ip + r = 90° ...(i)
When width of slit ‘a’ is doubled, the size of central band
becomes half and the intensity is doubled.  r = (90° – ip) ...(ii)
From Snell’s law, refractive index of second medium relative
to first medium (air) say.
WAVE OPTICS 102

sin i p sin i p sin i p

n  
sin r sin  90  i p  cos i p

 n = tan ip
–1
 Angle of incidence, ip = tan (n).

Example - 35
If a light beam shows no intensity variation when
transmitted through a polaroid which is rotated; does it
mean that the light is unpolarised ? Explain briefly.
Sol. Yes, the incident light (of intenisty I0) is unpolarised.
Reason : If incident light is unpolarised, the intensity of
transmitted light through a polaroid is always I0/2, which is
constant.
But if incident light is polarised, the intensity variation I = I0
2
cos , necessarily takes place.
WAVE OPTICS 103

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Wave Optics Basics 8. Which one of the following phenomena is not explained by
1. In Huygen’s wave theory, the loucs of all points in the Huygen’s construction of wavefront?
same state of vibration is called (a) Refraction (b) Reflection
(a) a half period zone (b) a wavefront (c) Diffraction (d) Origin of spectra
(a) a ray (d) vibrator
Young’s double slit experiment,
2. Light waves are 9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
(a) electromagnetic waves in nature the slits is halved and the distance between the slits and the
(b) cosmic rays screen is doubled. The fringe width is:–
(A) Unchanged (B) Halved
(c) infra–red rays
(C) Doubled (D) Quadrupled
(d) invisible in atmosphere 10. In Young’s double slit experiment using sodium light (l =
3. The electromagnetic waves travel with a velocity 5898Å), 92 fringes are seen. If given colour (l = 5461Å) is
used, how many fringes will be seen
(a) equal to the velocity of sound
(A) 62 (B) 67
(b) equal to the velocity of light (C) 85 (D) 99
(c) less than the velocity of light 11. In Young’s experiment, one slit is covered with a blue filter
(d) greater than the velocity of light and the other (slit) with a yellow filter. Then the interference
pattern:–
4. Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory of light suggests that (A) Will be blue (B) Will be yellow
the light consists of oscillation of (C) Will be green (D) Will not be formed
(a) magnetic vector alone 12. In Young’s double slit experiment, a mica sheet of thickness
(b) electric vector alone t and refractive index m is introduced in the path of ray from
the first source S1. By how much distance the fringe pattern
(c) electric and magnetic vectors perpendicular to eath
will be displaced
other
d D
(d) parallel electric and magnetic vectors. (A)    1 t (B)    1 t
D d
5. In Huygen’s wave theory, the loucs of all points in the
same state of vibration is called d D
(C)    1 D (D)    1
d
(a) a half period zone (b) a wavefront
13. In Young’s double slit experiment, if monochromatic light is
(a) a ray (d) vibrator
replaced by white light:–
6. Huygen’s concept of secondary wave (A) All bright fringes become white
(a) allows us to find the focal length of a thick lens (B) All bright fringes have colours between violet and red
(b) is a geometrical method to find a wavefront (C) Only the central fringe is white, all other fringes are
coloured
(c) is used to determine the velocity of light (D) No fringes are observed
(d) is used to explain polarisation 14. In the young’s double slit experiment the central maxima is
7. Huygens’ principle of secondary wavelets may be used observed to be I0 . If one of the slits is covered, then intensity
to: at the central maxima will become:–
(a) find the velocity of light in vacuum
I0 I0
(b) explain the particle’s behaviour of light (A) (B)
2 2
(c) find the new position of a wavefront
I0
(d) explain photoelectric effect (C) (D) I0
4
WAVE OPTICS 104

15. In Young’s double slit experiment, one of the slits is so

painted that intensity of light emitted from it is half of that
of the light emitted from other slit. Then
(A) fringe system will disappear
(B) bright fringes will become brighter and dark fringes will
be darker (C)
(C) both bright and dark fringes will become darker
(D) dark fringes will become less dark and bright fringes
will become less bright.
16. In YDSE how many maxima can be obtained on the screen
if wavelength of light used is 200 nm and d = 700 nm :
(A) 12 (B) 7
(C) 18 (D) None of these
17. In YDSE, the source placed symmetrically with respect to
the slit is now moved parallel to the plane of the slits it is (D)
closer to the upper slit, as shown. Then,

19. In a double slit experiment, instead of taking slits of equal

widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the other. Then in
the interference pattern.
(A) The intensifies of both the maxima and minima increase.
(A) The fringe width will increase and fringe pattern will (B) The intensity of the maxima increases and the minima
shift down. has zero intensity.
(B) The fringe width will remain same but fringe pattern will (C) The intensity of the maxima decreases and that o f
shift up. minima increases
(C) The fringe width will decrease and fringe pattern will (D) The intensity of the maxima decreases and the minima
shift down. has zero intensity.
(D) The fringe width will remain same but fringe pattern will 20. Let S1 and S2 be the two slits in Young’s double slit
shift down. experiment. If central maxima is observed at P and angle
18. In a YDSE experiment if a slab whose refractive index can
be varied is placed in front of one of the slits then the S1PS2   , then the fringe width for the light of
variation of resultant intensity at mid–point of screen with wavelength l will be. (Assume q to be a small angle)
(A) / (B) 
‘m’ will be best represented by    1 . [Assume slits of
(C) / (D) /2
equal width and there is no absorption by slab] 21. Two coherent narrow slits emitting light of wavelength  in
the same phase are placed parallel to each other at a small
separation of 3. The light is collected on a screen S which
is placed at a distance D (>>l) from the slits. The smallest
distance x such that the P is a maxima.

(A)

(B) (A) 3D (B) 8D

D
(C) 5D (D) 5
2
WAVE OPTICS 105

3 27. The intensity ratio of the two interfering beams of light

22. Minimum thickness of a mica sheet having   which is . What is the value of [(Imax – Imin)/(Imax + Imin)] ?
2
should be placed in front of one of the slits in YDSE is
(a) 2  (b) 2  / 1   
required to reduce the intensity at the centre of screen to
half of maximum intensity is-
(A) l/4 (B) l/8 (c) 2/(1 + ) (d) 1    / 2 
(C) l/2 (D) l/3
23. In the YDSE shown the two slits are covered with thin 28. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the two equally bright
sheets having thickness t & 2t and refractive index 2m and slits are coherent, but of phase difference /3. If the maximum
m. Find the position (y) of central maxima intensity on the screen is I0, the intensity at the point on the
screen equidistant from the slits is
(a) I0 (b) I0/2
(c) I0/4 (d) 3 I0/4
29. In an interference pattern produced by two indentical slits,
the intensity at the side of the central maximum is I. The
intensity at the same spot when either of the two slits is
closed is I0. Therefore
(a) I = I0
(b) I = 2 I0
tD (c) I = 4 I0
(A) zero (B)
d (d) I and I0 are not related to each other
tD 30. Two waves of same wavelength and amplitude interfere to
(C)  (D) None of these
d give a minimum when phase difference is
24. In a YDSE with two identical slits, when the upper slit is
covered with a thin, perfectly transparent sheet of mica, 
(a) 0 (b)
the intensity at the centre of screen reduces to 75% of the 2
initial value. Second minima is observed to be above this
3
point and third maxima below it. Which of the following (c)  (d)
can not be a possible value of phase difference caused by 2
the mica sheet 31. In a double slit experiment, the first minimum on either side
 13 of the central maximum occurs where the path difference
(A) (B) between the two paths is
3 3
17  11  
(C) (D) (a) (b)
3 3 4 2
25. Two monochromatic and coherent point sources (c)  (d) 2 
of light are placed at a certain distance from eachother in
the horizontal plane. The locus of all those points in the 32. Two waves originating from sources S1 and S2 having zero
horizontal plane which have constructive interference will phase difference and common wavelength  will show
be– completely destructive interference at a point P if (S1P –
(A) A hyperbola S2P) is
(B) Family of hyperbolas (a) 5  (b) 3 /4
(C) Family of straight lines
(D) Family of parabolas (c) 2  (d) 11/2
26. If the distance between the first maxima and fifth minima of 33. Two waves having the intensities in the ratio of 9 : 1 produce
a double slit pattern is 7 mm and the slits are separated by interference. The ratio of maximum to minimum intensity is
0.15 mm with the screen 50 cm from the slits, then equal to
wavelength of the light used is
(A) 600 nm (B) 525 nm (a) 10 : 8 (b) 9 : 1
(C) 467 nm (D) 420 nm (c) 4 : 1 (d) 2 : 1
WAVE OPTICS 106

34. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I 40. Two point source separated by d = 5 m emit light of
and 4 I are superposed. The maximumm and minimum wavelength =2 m in phase. A circular wire of radius 20
possible intensities in the resulting beam are m is placed around the source as shown in figure.

(a) 5 I and I (b) 5 I and 3 I

(c) 9 I and I (d) 9 I and 3 I
35. What is the path difference for destructive interference ?
(a) n (b) n ( + 1)

 n  1   2n 1 
(c) (d)
2 2
36. If an inteference pattern has maximum and minimum
intensities in the ratio of 36 : 1 then what will be the ratio of (A) Points A and B are dark and points C and D are bright.
amplitudes (B) Points A and B are bright and point C and D are dark.
(C) Points A and C are dark and points B and D are bright.
(a) 5 : 7 (b) 7 : 4 (D) Points A and C are bright and points B and D are dark.
(c) 4 : 7 (d) 7 : 5 41. Which of the following statement is/are correct for coherent
37. When viewed in white light, soap bubbles show colours sources ?
because of I. Two coherent sources emit light waves of same
(a) interference (b) scattering wavelength.
(c) diffraction (d) disperscion II. Two coherent sources emit light wavers of same frequency
38. The diagram below shows, two sources A and B, vibrating III. Two coherent sources have zero or constant initial phase
in phase, in the same uniform medium and producing difference with respect to time
circular wave fronts. Choose the correct option from the codes given below:
(a) Only I (b) I and III
(c) II and III (d) I, II and III
42. In Young’s double slit experiment, the interference pattern is
found to have an intensity ratio between bright and dark
fringes, as 9. This implies that
(a) the intensities at the screen due to the two slits are 5
units and 4 units respectively
(b) the intensities at the screen due to the two slits are 4
units and 1 unit respectively
(c) the amplitude ratio is 3
Which phenomenon occurs at point P ? (d) the amplitude ratio is 2
(a) Destructive interference 43. In Young’s experiment the wavelength of red light is 7.8
–5 –5
× 10 cm and that of blue light is 5.2 × 10 cm. The value of
(b) Constructive interference th
n for which (n + 1)th blue bright band coincides with n red
(c) Reflection band is
(d) Refraction (a) 4 (b) 3
39. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference we (c) 2 (d) 1
require two sources which emit radiation of
44. We shift Young’s double slit experiment from air to water.
(a) nearly the same frequency Assuming that water is still and clear, it can be predicted that
(b) the same frequency the fringe pattern will
(c) different wavelength
(d) the same frequency and having a definite phase (a) remain unchanged (b) disappear
relationship (c) shrink (d) be enlarged
WAVE OPTICS 107

45. In Young’s double slit interference experiment, the distance (a) 0.24 cm (b) 2.21 cm
between two sources is 0.1 mm. The distance of the screen (c) 1.28 cm (d) 0.12 cm
from the sources is 20 cm. Wavelength of light used is 5460
52. In the Young’s double slit experiment using sodium light
Å. Then the angular position of the first dark fringe is
( = 5898 Å, 92 fringes are seen. If given colour ( = 5461 Å)
(a) 0.08° (b) 0.16° is used, how many fringes will be seen ?
(c) 0.20° (d) 0.32° (a) 62 (b) 67

46. The displacement of the interfering light waves are (c) 85 (d) 99

y1 = 4 sin t 53. In the two separate set-ups of the Young’s double slit
experiment, fringes of equal width are observed when lights
and y2 = 3 sin (t + /2)
of wavelengths in the ratio 1 : 2 are used. If the ratio of the
What is the amplitude of resultant wave ? slit separation in the two cases is 2 : 1, the ratio of the
(a) 5 (b) 7 distances between the plane of the slits and the screen, in
the two set ups in
(c) 1 (d) zero
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 1
47. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 2 : 1
the slit is halved and the distance between the slits and
54. When light wave suffers reflection at the interface between
screen is doubled. The fringe width is
air and glass, the change of phase of the reflected wave is
(a) unchanged (b) halved equal to
(c) double (d) quadrupled (a) zero (b) /2
48. In Young’s double slit experiment if the slit widths are in the (c)  (d) 2
ratio 1 : 9, the ratio of the intensity at minima to that at
Diffraction
maxima will be
55. To observe diffraction, the size of an obstacle
(a) 1 (b) 1/9
(a) should be of the same order as wavelength
(c) 1/4 (d) 1/3
(b) should be much larger than the wavelength
49. In Young’s double slit interference experiment if the slit (c) have no relation to wavelength
separation is made 3 folds the fringe width becomes
(d) should be exactly /2
(a) 1/3 fold (b) 3 fold 56. A diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light.
(c) 3/6 fold (d) 6 fold What happens if the red light is replaced by blue light

50. Two slits separated by a distance of 1 mm are illuminated (a) no change

–7
with red light of wavelength 6.5 × 10 m. The interference (b) diffraction bands become narrower and crowded together
fringes are observed on a screen placed 1 m from the slits. (c) bands become broader and farther apart
The distance between third dark fringe and the fifth bright (d) bands disappear
fringe is equal to
57 Diffraction and interference indicate
(a) 0.65 mm (b) 1.63 mm (a) wave nature (b) particle nature
(c) 3.25 mm (d) 4.88 mm (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of the above
51. In a double slit interference experiment the distance between 58. The condition for observing Fraunhofer diffraction from a
the slits is 0.05 cm and screen is 2 m away from the slits. The single slit is that the light wavefront incident on the slit
–5
wavelength of light is 6.0 × 10 cm. The distance between should be
the fringes is (a) spherical (b) cylinderical
(c) plane (d) elliptical
WAVE OPTICS 108

59. The main difference in the phenomenon of interference and 66. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate of
diffraction is that refractive index 1.55 at the polarising angle. The angle of
(a) diffraction is due to interaction of light from the same refraction is
wavefront whereas interference is the interaction of
(a) 53° (b) 32°49’
waves from two isolated sources.
(b) diffraction is due to interaction of light from same (c) 147°11’ (d) 0°
wavefront, whereas the interference is the interaction 67. From Brewster’s law for polarisation, it follows that the angle
of two waves derived from the same source. of polarisation depends upon
(c) diffraction is due to interaction of waves derived from (a) the wavelength of light
the same sources, whereas the interference is the
bending of light from the same wavefront. (b) plane of polarisation’s orientation
(d) diffraction is caused by reflected waves from a source (c) plane of vibration’s orientation
whereas interference caused is due to refraction of waves (d) none of the above
from a surface.
68. Choose the correct statement
60. The first diffraction minima due to a single slit diffraction is
at  = 30° for a light of wavelength 5000 Å. The width of the (a) the Brewster’s angle is independent of wavelength of
slit is light
–5 –4
(a) 5 × 10 cm (b) 1.0 × 10 cm (b) the Brewster’s angle is independent of nature of
(c) 2.5 × 10 cm
–5 –5
(d) 1.25 × 10 cm reflecting surface
61. A slit of width a is illuminated by white light. The first (c) the Brewster ’s angle is different for different
minimum for red light ( = 6500 Å) will fall at  = 30° when a wavelengths
will be
–4
(d) Brewster’s angle depends on wavelength but not on
(a) 3250 Å (b) 6.5 × 10 cm the nature of reflecting surface.
–4
(c) 1.3 micron (d) 2.6 × 10 cm
69. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate at an
62. Light of wavelength  is incident on a slit of width d . The angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s angle . If  represents
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen at a the refractive index of glass with respect to air, then the
distance D. The linear width of the principal maximum is
angle between reflected and refracted rays is
then equal to the width of the slit if D equals
(d) d/ (d) 2/d (a) 90° + 
2 2 –1
(c) d /2 (d) 2 /d (b) sin ( cos )
63. Find the half angular width of the central bright maximum in (c) 90°
the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a slit of width 12 105 –1
(d) 90° – sin (sin /)
cm when the slit is illuminated by monochromatic light of
wavelength 6000 Å. 70. When unpolarised light is incident on a plane glass plate at
(A) 40° (B) 45° Brewster’s (polarising) angle, then which of the following
(C) 30° (D) 60° statements is correct
(a) reflected and refracted rays are completely polarised with
Brewsters Law their planes of polarisation parallel to each other.
64. If the light is polarised by reflection, then the angle between (b) reflected and refracted rays are completely polarised with
reflected and refracted light is their planes of polarisation perpendicular to each other
(a)  (b) /2 (c) the reflected light is plane polarised but transmitted light
(c) 2  (d) /4 is partially polarised
(d) the reflected light is partially polarised but refracted light
65. A ray of light strikes a glass plate at an angle of 60°. If the
is plane polarised.
reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other,
the index of refraction of glass is 71. The angle of incidence at which reflected light in totally
polarized for reflection from air to glass (refractive index n), is
(a) (b) 3/2 –1 –1
3 (a) sin (n) (b) sin (1/n)
–1 –1
(c) tan (1/n) (d) tan (n)
(c) 3/ 2 (d) 1/2
WAVE OPTICS 109

Polarisation (a) I0 (b) I0/2

72. A polaroid is placed at 45° to an incoming light of intensity
(c) I0/4 (d) I0/8
I0 . Now the intensity of light passing through polaroid 77. In a Fraunhofer’s diffraction by a slit, if slit width is a,
after polarisation would be : wave length l, focal length of lens is f, linear width of
(A) I0 (B) I0 / 2 central maxima is :–

(C) I0 / 4 (D) Zero f fa

(A) (B)
73. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate at a 
an angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s angle f. If µ 2f f
represents the refractive index of glass with respect to air, (C) (D)
a 2a
then the angle between reflected and refracted rays is:
(A) 90 + f 78. The angle of polarisation for any medium is 60°, what will
be critical angle for this :
(B) sin 1 ( cos )
(A) sin 1 3 (B) tan 1 3
(C) 90°
(C) cos 1 3 (D) sin 1 3
(D) 90  sin 1 (sin  /  )
79. Sound waves do not exhibit
74. A beam of light AO is incident on a glass slab ( = 1.54) in
a direction as shown in figure. The reflected ray OB is (a) refraction (b) interference
passed through a Nicol prism on viewing through a Nicol (c) diffraction (d) polarisation
prism, we find on rotating the prism that
80. Polarisation of light proves the
A N B
(a) corpuscular nature of light
(b) quantum nature of light
33° 33°
O (c) transverse nature of light
(d) longitudinal wave nature of light
81. Light waves can be polarised because they
(a) the intensity is reduced down to zero and remains zero
(a) have high frequencies
(b) the intensity reduces down somewhat and rises again
(b) have short wavelength
(c) there is no change in intensity
(c) are transverse
(d) the intensity gradually reduces to zero and then again
increases. (d) can be reflected

75. Two beams, A and B, of plane polarized light with mutually 82. Light transmitted by a Nicol crystal is
perpendicular planes of polarization are seen through a (a) plane polarised (b) unpolarised
polaroid. From the position when the beam A has
(c) circularly polarised (d) elliptically polarised
maximum intensity (and beam B has zero intensity), a
rotation of polaroid through 30° makes the two beams 83. Polaroid glass is used in sun glasses because
appear equally bright. If the initial intensities of the two (a) it reduces the light intensity to half on account of polarisation

IA (b) it is fashionable
beams are IA and IB respectively, then equals :
IB (c) it has good colour
(d) it is cheaper
(a) 3/2 (b) 1
(c) 1/3 (d) 3
76. A beam of unpolarized light of intensity I0 is passed
through a polaroid A and then through another polaroid B
which is oriented so that its principal plane makes an angle
of 45° relative to that of A. The intensity of the emergent
light is :
WAVE OPTICS 110

EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. In a Young’s double slit experiment with light of wavelength (b) a  L and bmin  4L
the separation of slits is d and distance of screen is D
such that D >> d >> . If the fringe width is , the distance 2
(c) a  and bmin  4L
from point of maximum intensity to the point where intensity L
falls to half of maximum intensity on either side is :
2  2 2 
(2015 Online) a and bmin   
L  L 
  (d)
(a) (b) 5. A single slit of width b is illuminated by a coherent
 3
monochromatic light of wavelength . If the second and fourth
  minima in the diffraction pattern at a distance 1 m from the slit
(c) (d)
4 2 are at 3 cm and 6cm respectively from the central maximum,
2. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between what is the width of the central maximum ? (i.e. distance
slits and the screen is 1.0 m and monochromatic light of between first minimum on either side of the central maximum)
600 nm is being used. A person standing near the slits is (2017 Online Set-1)
looking at the fringe pattern. When the separation between (a) 1.5 cm (b) 3.0 cm
the slits is varied, the interference pattern disappears for a (c) 4.5 cm (d) 6.0 cm
particular distance d0 between the slits. If the angular
6. A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated by a parallel
1 beam of light of wavelength 6000 Å and diffraction bands
resolution of the eye is , the value of d0 is close to:
60 are observed on a screen 0.5 m from the slit. The distance
of the third dark band from the central bright band is :
(2016 Online Set-1)
(2017 Online Set-2)
(a) 1 mm (b) 2 mm
(a) 3 mm (b) 9 mm
(c) 4 mm (d) 3 m
(c) 4.5 mm (d) 1.5 mm
3. Linearly polarised light travelling along x-axis passes
7. An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards
through a polariser sheet in y-z plane having transmission a stationary microwave source emitting waves at frequency
10 GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured
axis y = z. If electric field oscillations in incident light is
by the observer ? (speed of light = 3 × 108 ms–1) (2017)
represented by E y  E 0 sin  kx  t  and
(a) 15.3 GHz (b) 10.1 GHz
(c) 12.1 GHz (d) 17.3 GHz
E z  3E 0 sin  kx  t  then amplitude of electric field
8. In a Young’s double slit experiment, slits are separated by
in transmitted light will be: (2016 Online Set-2) 0.5 mm, and the screen is placed 150 cm away. A beam of
(a) 2E 0 cos15 (b) E 0 cos 45 light consisting of two wavelengths, 650 nm and 520 nm,
is used to obtain interference fringes on the screen. The
(c) 2E 0 (d) E 0 cos15
least distance from the common central maximum to the
4. The box of a pin hole camera, of length L, has a hole of point where the bright fringes due to both the wavelengths
radius a. It is assumed that when the hole is illuminated by coincide is: (2017)
a parallel beam of light of wavelength  the spread of the (a) 1.56 mm (b) 7.8 mm
spot (obtained on the opposite wall of the camera) is the
(c) 9.75 mm (d) 15.6 mm
sum of its geometrical spread and the spread due to
9. A plane polarized monochromatic EM wave is traveling in
diffraction. The spot would then have its minimum size
vacuum along z direction such that at t = t1 it is found that
(say bmin) when : (2016)
the electric field is zero at a spatial point z1. The next zero
 22  that occurs in its neighbourhood is at z2. The frequency
(a) a  L and bmin   L  of the electromagnetic wave is : (2018 Online Set-2)
 
WAVE OPTICS 111

3×108 1.5×108 1 1
(1) z - z (2) z - z  1 2  1 4
2 1 2 1 (c) cos  =   (d) cos  =  
3 3
1
6×108 z 2 - z1 13. Unpolarized light of intensity I passes through an ideal
(3) z - z (4) t1 +
2 1 3×10 8 polarizer A. Another identical polarizer B is placed behind
10. Light of wavelength 550 nm falls normally on a slit of I
A. The intensity of light beyond B is found to be . Now
-5
width 22.0 ×10 cm. The angular position of the second 2
minima from the central maximum will be (in radians) : another identical polarizer C is placed between A andB.
(2018 Online Set-1) I
The intensity beyond B is now found to be . The angle
8

(a)  (b) between polarizer A and Cis :
8
12
(2018)

(c)  (d) (a) 45° (b) 60°
6 4
(c) 0° (d) 30°
11. A plane polarized light is incident on a polariser with its
14. The angular width of the central maximum in a single slit
pass axis making angle  with x-axis, as shown in the figure.
diffraction pattern is 60°. The width of the slits is 1m.
At four different values of ,  = 80 ,380 , 1880 and 2180, the The slit is illuminated by monochromatic plane waves. If
another slit of same width is made near it, Young’s fringes
observed intensities are same. What is the angle between
can be observed on a screen placed at a distance 50 cm
the direction of polarization and x-axis ? from the slits. If the observed fringe width is 1 cm, what is
(2018 Online Set-2) slit separation distance?
(2018)
(a) 75 m (b) 100 m
(c) 25 m (d) 50 m
15. In an interference experiment the ratio of amplitudes of
a 1
coherent waves is 1  . The ratio of maximum and
a2 3
minimum intensities of fringes will be:
(a) 980 (b) 1280 (2019-04-08/Shift -1)
(c) 203 0
(d) 45 0 (a) 2 (b) 18
12. Unpolarized light of intensity I is incident on a system of (c) 4 (d) 9
two polarizers, A followed by B. The intensity of emergent 16. A wire of length 2L, is made by joining two wires A and B
I of same length but different radii r and 2r and made of the·
light is . If a third polarizer C is placed between A and B,
2 same material. It is vibrating at a frequency such that the
joint of the two wires forms a node. If the number of
I
the intensity of emergent light is reduced to . The angle antinodes in wire A is p and that in B is q then the value of
3
p/q is: (2019-04-08/Shift -1)
between the polarizers A and C is  . Then :
(2018 Online Set-3)
1 1
 2 4
(a) cos  =  2  2 (b) cos  =  
  3
3 17. The figure shows a Young’s double slit experimental setup.
It is observed that when a thin transparent sheet of
thickness t and refractive index  is put in front of one of
the slits, the central maximum gets shifted by a distance
WAVE OPTICS 112

equal to n fringe widths. If the wavelength of light used is on P 1, the intensity of light transmitted by the three
 , t will be: (2019-04-09/Shift -1)
polarizers in I. The ratio  I 0  equals (nearly):
 I 
 
(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
(a) 5.33 (b) 16.00
(c) 10.67 (d) 1.80
22. Two coherent sources produce waves of different
2nD nD  intensities which interfere. After interference, the ratio of
(a) a    1 (b) a    1 the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity is 16. The
intensity of the waves are in the ratio:
n 2 D
(c)    1 (d) a    1 (2019-01-09/Shift -1)
(a) 16 : 9 (b) 25 : 9
18. Diameter of the objective lens of a telescope is 250 cm. For
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 5 : 3
light ofwavelength 600 nm coming from a distant object,
23. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are placed
the limit ofresolution ofthe telescopeis closeto:
0.320 mm apart. Light of wavelength  = 500 nm is incident
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
on the slits. The total number of bright fringes that are
(a) 1.5  107 rad (b) 2.0  107 rad
observed in the angular range –30° < 30° < 30° is
(c) 3.0 107 rad (d) 4.5 107 rad
(2019-01-09/Shift -2)
19. A thin disc of mass M and radius R has mass per unitarea
(a) 640 (b) 320
  r  = kr2 where r is the distance from its centre. Itsmoment
(c) 321 (d) 641
of inertia about an axis going through its centre ofmass 24. In a Young’s double slit experiment with slit separation 0.1
and perpendicular to its plane is : (2019-04-10/Shift -1)
1
MR 2 2MR 2 mm, one observes a bright fringe at an angle rad by
(a) (b) 40
3 3 using light of wavelength λ1. When the light of wavelength
2
MR MR 2
(c) (d) λ2 is used, a bright fringe is seen at the same angle in the
6 2 same set up. Given that λ1 and λ2, are in visible range (380
20. In a double slit experiment, when a thin film of thickness t
nm to 740 nm), their possible values are:
and having refractive index μ is introduced in front of one
(2019-01-10/Shift -1)
of the slits, the maximum at the centre of the fringe pattern
(a) 625 nm, 500 nm (b) 380 nm, 525 nm
shifts by one fringe width. The value of t is ( is the (c) 380 nm, 500 nm (d) 400 nm, 500 nm
wavelength of the light used): (2019-04-12/Shift -1) 25. Consider a Young’s double slit experiment as shown in
2 
(a)    1 (b) 2    1 figure. What should be the slit separation d in terms of
wavelength λ such that the first minimum occurs directly
 
(c)    1 (d)  2   1 in front of the slit (S1)? (2019-01-10/Shift -2)

21. Asystem of three polarizers Pl, P2, P3 is set up such that

the pass axis of P3 is crossed with respect to that of P1.
The pass axis of P2 is inclined at 60° to the pass axis of P3.
When a beam of unpolarized light of intensity I0 is incident
WAVE OPTICS 113

 31. A beam of plane polarised light of large cross-sectional area


and uniform intensity of 3.3 Wm-2 falls normally on a polariser
(a) 2  52  (b)
 5 2  (cross sectional area 3 10-4 m2 ) which rotates about its
 
axis with an angular speed of 31.4 rad/s. The energy of light

(c) 2 5  2
 
(d) 5  2
 passing through the polariser per revolution, is close to:
26. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the path difference at a
(2020-09-04/Shift -1)
certain point on the screen, between two interfering waves
(a) 1.0×10-4 J (b) 1.0×10-5 J
is 1 th of wavelength. The ratio of the intensity at this point
8 (c) 5.0×10-4 J (d) 1.5×10-4 J
to that at the centre of a bright fringe is close to:
32. Orange light of wavelength 6000×10–10 m illuminates a single
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
slit of width 0.6 × 10–4 m.The maximum possible number of
(a) 0.74 (b) 0.85 diffraction minima produced on both sides of thecentral
(c) 0.94 (d) 0.80 maximum is ___________. (2020-09-04/Shift -2)
27. In a double-slit experiment, green light (5303Å) falls on 33. In the figure below, P and Q are two equally intense coherent
adouble slit having a separation of 19.44 μm anda width sources emitting radiation of wavelength 20 m. The
separation between P and Q is 5 m and the phase of P is
of4.05 μm. The number ofbright fringes between the first
ahead of that of Q by 90°. A, B and C are three distinct
andthe second diffraction minima is:(2019-01-11/Shift -2) points of observation, each equidistant from the midpoint
(a) 10 (b) 05 of PQ. The intensities of radiation at A,B,C will be in the
(c) 04 (d) 09 ratio: (2020-09-06/Shift -1)
28. Interference fringes are observed on a screen by
illuminating two thin slits 1 mm apart with a light source
(  632.8 nm). The distance between the screen and the
slits is 100 cm. If a bright fringe is observed on screen at a
distance of 1.27 mm from the central bright fringe, then the
path difference between the waves, which are reaching
this point from the slits is close to :(2020-09-02/Shift -1)
(a) 2.05 m (b) 2.87 nm (a) 4 : 1 : 0 (b) 2 : 1 : 0

(c) 2 nm (d) 1.27 m (c) 0 : 1 : 2 (d) 0 : 1 : 4

29. In a Young’s double slit experiment, 16 fringes are observed 34. A young’s double-slit experiment is performed using

in a certain segment of the screen when light of wavelength monochromatic light of wavelength . The intensity of light

700 nm is used. If the wavelength of light is changed to 400 at a point on the screen, where the path difference is , is K

nm, the number of fringes observed in the same segment of units. The intensity of light at a point where the path

the screen would be (2020-09-02/Shift -2)  nK

difference is is given by , where n is an integer. The
(a) 28 (b) 24 6 12
(c) 30 (d) 18 value of n is ________ . (2020-09-06/Shift -2)

30. In a Young’s double slit experiment, light of 500 nm is used 35. A polarizer-analyzer set is adjusted such that the intensity
to produce an interference pattern. When the distance of light coming out of the analyzer is just 10% of the original
between the slits is 0.05 mm, the angular width (in degree) intensity. Assuming that the polarizer-analyzer set does not
of the fringes formed on the distance screen is close to : absorb any light, the angle by which the analyser need to
be rotated further to reduce the output intensity to be zero is
(2020-09-03/Shift -1)
(2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(a) 0.17º (b) 0.07º
(a) 45° (b) 71.6°
(c) 0.57º (d) 1.7º
(c) 90° (d) 18.4°
WAVE OPTICS 114

36. Visible light of wavelength 6000 10 8 cm falls normally 40. In a Young’s double slit experiment 15 fringes are observed
on a single slit and produces a diffraction pattern. It is on a small portion of the screen when light of wavelength
found that the second diffraction minima is at 60° from 500nm is used. 10 fringes are observed on the same section
the central maxima. If the first minimum is produced at of the screen when another light source of wavelength is
used. Then the value of is (nm)
1 ,then 1 is close to (2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
(a) 20° (b) 30°
41 Let S1 and S2 be the two slits in Young’s double slit
(c) 45° (d) 25°
experiment. If central maxima is observed at P and angle
37. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
the slits is 0.15mm. In the experiment, a source of light of S1PS2   , then the fringe width for the light of wavelength
wavelength 589nm is used and the interference pattern is  will be. (Assume q to be a small angle)
observed on a screen kept 1.5m away. The separation (A) /q (B) q
between the successive bright fringes on the screen is (C) 2/q (D) /2q
(2020-01-07/Shift -2) 42. Two point source separated by d = 5 mm emit light of
(a) 5.9 mm (b) 3.9 mm wavelength = 2 mm in phase. A circular wire of radius 20
(c) 6.9 mm (d) 4.9 mm mm is placed around the source as shown in figure.
38. In a double-slit experiment, at a certain point on the screen
the path difference between the two interfering waves is
1
th of a wavelength. The ratio of the intensity of light at
8
that point to that at the centre of a bright fringe is
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
(a) 0.568 (b) 0.853
(c) 0.672 (d) 0.760 (A) Points A and B are dark and points C and D are bright.
3
39. A wire of length L and mass per unit length 6  10 kg/m is (B) Points A and B are bright and point C and D are dark.
put under tension of 540N. Two consecutive frequencies (C) Points A and C are dark and points B and D are bright.
that it resonates at are: 420Hz and 490Hz. Then L in meters (D) Points A and C are bright and points B and D are dark.
is
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
(a) 8.1m (b) 2.1m
(c) 1.1m (d) 5.1m
WAVE OPTICS 115

EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. In figure, a wavefront AB moving in air is incident on a 6. A beam with wavelength  falls on a stack of partially
plane glass surface xy. Its position CD after refraction reflecting planes with separation d. The angle  that the
through a glass slab is shown also along with normals beam should make with the planes so that the beams
drawn at A and D. The refractive index of glass with respect reflected from successive planes may interfere
to air will be equal to constructively is (where n =1, 2, ……)

sin  sin 
(a) sin  (b) sin 
1  n   1  n  
(a) sin   (b) tan  
 d   d 
(c) (BD/AC) (d) (AB/CD)

Huygens Principle
1  n   1  n  
2. Huygen wave theory allows us to know (c) sin   (d) cos  
 2d   2d 
(a) The wavelength of the wave
(b) The velocity of the wave 7. Two ideal slits S1 and S2 are at a distance d apart, and
illuminated by light of wavelength  passing through an
(c) The amplitude of the wave
ideal source slit S placed on the line through S2 as shown.
(d) The propagation of wave fronts The distance between the planes of slits and the source
3. According to Huygen’s wave theory, point on any wave slit is D. A screen is held at a distance D from the plane of
front may be regarded as the slits. The minimum value of d for which there is
darkness at O is
(a) A photon (b) An electron
(c) A new source of wave (d) Neutron
4. Speed of light is
(a) the same in medium–1 and medium–2
(b) larger in medium–1 than in medium–2
(c) larger in medium–2 than in medium–1
(d) different at b and d
5. In Young’s double slit experiment how many maximas can
be obtained on a screen (including the central maximum)
on both sides of the central fringe if  = 2000 Å and 3D
d = 7000 Å (a) (b) D
2
(a) 12 (b) 7
D
(c) 18 (d) 4 (c) (d) 3D
2
WAVE OPTICS 116

8. In a Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is 14. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are 2 mm
0.2 mm. If the wavelength of light used is increased by apart and are illuminated with a mixture of two wavelength
10% and the separation between the slits is also increased 0 = 750 nm and  = 900 nm. The minimum distance from
by 10%, the fringe width will be the common central bright fringe on a screen 2m from the
slits where a bright fringe from one interference pattern
(a) 0.20 mm (b) 0.401 mm coincides with a bright fringe from the other is
(c) 0.242 mm (d) 0.165 mm (a) 1.5 mm (b) 3 mm
9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the phase difference (c) 4.5 mm (d) 6 mm
between the light waves reaching third bright fringe from
the central fringe will be ( = 6000 Å) 
15. At a point having a path difference of the intensity will
4
(a) Zero (b) 2
be
(c) 4 (d) 6 2
(a) 0 (b) a
10. In Young’s experiment, if the distance between screen and (c) 2a
2 2
(d) a /2
the slit aperture is increased the fringe width will
16. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference, we
(a) Decrease require two sources which emit radiation
(b) Increases but intensity will decrease (a) Of the same frequency & having a definite phase relationship
(c) Increase but intensity remains unchanged (b) Of nearly the same frequency
(d) Remains unchanged but intensity decreases (c) Of the same frequency

11. In a two slit experiment with monochromatic light fringes (d) Of different wavelengths
are obtained on a screen placed at some distance from 17. If the ratio of amplitude of two waves is 4 : 3, then the ratio
–2
the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 × 10 m towards of maximum and minimum intensity is
–5 (a) 16 : 18 (b) 18 : 16
the slits, the change in fringe width is 3 × 10 m. If
–3
separation between the slits is 10 m, the wavelength of (c) 49 : 1 (d) 94 : 1
light used is 18. In Young’s double slit experiment, the central bright fringe
(a) 6000 Å (b) 5000 Å can be identified
(c) 3000 Å (d) 4500 Å (a) By using white light instead of monochromatic light
(b) As it is narrower than other bright fringes
12 The maximum intensity in Young’s double slit experiment
is I0. Distance between the slits is d = 5, where  is the (c) As it is wider than other bright fringes
wavelength of monochromatic light used in the experiment. (d) As it has a greater intensity than the other bright fringes
What will be the intensity of light in front of one of the 19. The figure below shows a double slit experiment. P and Q
slits on a screen at a distance D = 10d are the slits. The path lengths PX and QX are n and
(n + 2) respectively where n is a whole number and  is
I0 3 the wavelength. Taking the central bright fringe as zero,
(a) (b) I0
2 4 what is formed at X

I0
(c) I0 (d)
4
13. In a Young’s double slit experiment, let  be the fringe width,
and let I0 be the intensity at the central bright fringe. At a
distance x from the central bright fringe, the intensity will be
-
x 2x
(a) I 0 cos   (b) I 0 cos  
 

(a) First bright (b) First dark

2  x   I0  2  x 
(c) I 0 cos   (d)   cos   (c) Second bright (d) Second dark
   4   
WAVE OPTICS 117

20. In the figure is shown Young’s double slit experiment. Q is

the position of the first bright fringe on the right side of O.
th
P is the 11 fringe on the other side, as measured from Q.
–10
If the wavelength of the light used is 6000 × 10 m, then
S1B will be equal to

1  2
(a) cos (b) cos 1
d d

1  1 
(c) sin (d) sin
d 2d

–6 –6 25. In Young’s double slit experiment the y-coordinates of

(a) 6 × 10 m (b) 6.6 × 10 m
–7 –7 central maxima and 10th maxima are 2 cm and 5 cm
(c) 3.138 × 10 m (d) 3.144 × 10 m
respectively. When the YDSE apparatus is immersed
21. In a double slit experiment, instead of taking slits of equal in a liquid of refractive index 1.5 the corresponding
widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the other. Then in
y-coordinates will be
the interference pattern
(a) The intensities of both the maxima and the minima increase (a) 2 cm, 7.5 cm (b) 3 cm, 6 cm

(b) The intensity of the maxima increases and minima has (c) 2 cm, 4 cm (d) 4/3 cm, 10/3 cm
zero intensity 26. In Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is . If
(c) The intensity of the maxima decreases and that of entire arrangement is placed in a liquid of refractive index
minima increases n, the fringe width becomes
(d) The intensity of the maxima decreases and the minima

has zero intensity (a) (b) n
th n 1
22. In a double slit experiment if 5 dark fringe is formed
opposite to one of the slits, the wavelength of light is (c) /n (d) /n – 1
27. In a double slit arrangement fringes are produced using
d2 d2 light of wavelength 4800 Å. One slit is covered by a thin
(a) (b)
6D 5D plate of glass of refractive index 1.4 and the other with
another glass plate of same thickness but of refractive
d2 d2 index 1.7. By doing so the central bright shifts to original
(c) (d)
15 D 9D fifth bright fringe from centre. Thickness of glass plate is

23 Young’s double slit experiment is made in a liquid. The (a) 8 m (b) 6 m

10th bright fringe in liquid lies, where 6th dark fringes lies (c) 4 m (d) 10 m
in vacuum. The refractive index of the liquid is
approximately : 28. In Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity of light
coming from the first slit is double the intensity from the
(a) 1.8 (b) 1.54
second slit. The ratio of the maximum intensity to the
(c) 1.67 (d) 1.2
minimum intensity on the interference fringe pattern
24. A parallel beam of monochromatic light is used in a Young’s
observed is
double slit experiment. The slits are separated by a distance
d and the screen is placed parallel to the plane of the slits. (a) 34 (b) 40
The angle which the incident beam must make with the
(c) 25 (d) 38
normal to the plane of the slits to produce darkness at the
position of central brightness is
WAVE OPTICS 118

29. A monochromatic beams of light is used for the formation

of fringes on the screen by illuminating the two slits in the
Young’s double slit mica is interposed in the path of one S1
of the interfering beams then O
S2

(a) At O
(b) Above O
(c) Below O
(d) Anywhere depending on angle , thickness of plate t
(a) The fringe width increases and refractive index of glass 

(b) The fringe width decreases 34. A flake of glass (refractive index 1.5) is placed over one of
the openings of a double slit apparatus. The interference
(c) The fringe width remains the same but the pattern shifts
pattern displaces itself through seven successive maxima
(d) The fringe pattern disappears towards the side where the flake is placed. if wavelength
30. When a thin transparent plate of thickness t and refractive of the diffracted light is  = 600 nm, then the thickness of
index  is placed in the path of one of the two interfering the flake is
waves of light, then the path difference changes by (a) 2100 nm (b) 4200 nm
(a) ( + 1) t (b) ( – 1) t (c) 8400 nm (d)None of these
35. What is the thickness of the plate ?
  1   1
(c) (d) (a) 5 m (b) 0.005 m
t t
(c) 7 m (d) 0.007 m
31. In Young’s double slit experiment, a mica slit of thickness
t and refractive index  is introduced in the ray from the 36. If the source is now changed to green light of wavelength
–7
first source S1. By how much distance the fringes pattern 10 m, the central fringe shifts to a position initially occupied
will be displaced by the 6th bright fringe due to red light. What will be refractive
index of glass plate for the 2nd light for changed source of
d D light ?
(a)   1 t (b)    1 t
D d
(a) 2.6 m (b) 1.6 m
d D
(c)   1 D (d)   1 (c) 1.2 m (d) 2.2 m
d
37. Change in fringe width produced due to change in
32. When one of the slits of Young’s experiment is covered wavelength is
with a transparent sheet of thickness 4.8 mm, the central –4
(a) 1.7 × 10 m
–4
(b) –0.47 × 10 m
th
fringe shifts to a position originally occupied by the 30 –4 –4
(c) –0.37 × 10 m (d) –0.27 × 10 m
bright fringe. What should be the thickness of the sheet if
4
the central fringe has to shift to the position occupied by 38. In YDSE, find the thickness of a glass slab (in × 10 Å)
th ( = 1.5) which should be placed before the upper slit S1 so
20 bright fringe
that central maximum now lies at a point where 5th bright
(a) 3.8 mm (b) 1.6 mm
fringe was lying earlier (before inserting the slab).
(c) 7.6 mm (d) 3.2 mm Wavelength of light used is 5000 Å.
33. A monochromatic beam of light falls on YDSE apparatus 39. The value of  is
at some angle (say ) as shown in figure. A thin sheet of
(a) 0.21 (b) 0.42
glass is inserted in front of the lower slit S2. The central
bright fringe (path difference = 0) will be obtained (c) 0.12 (d) 0.50
WAVE OPTICS 119

40. A monochromatic light of  = 5000 Å is incident on two Multiple Answer Questions (more than one correct)
–4
identical slits separated by a distance of 5 × 10 m. The 46. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the ratio of
interference pattern is seen on a screen placed at a distance intensities of bright and dark fringes is 9. This means that
of 1 m from the plane of slits. A thin glass plate of thickness
–6
1.5 × 10 m and refractive index  = 1.5 is placed between (a) The intensities of individual sources are 5 and 4 units
one of the slits and the screen. Find the intensity at the respectively
centre of screen. (b) The intensities of individual sources are 4 and 1 units
41. Two coherent sources of different intensities send waves respectively
which interfere. The ratio of maximum intensity to the (c) The ratio of their amplitudes is 3
minimum intensity is 25. The intensities of the sources are (d) The ratio of their amplitudes is 2
in the ratio
47. In Young’s double slit experiment, white light is used.
(a) 25 : 1 (b) 5 : 1 The separation between the slits is b. the screen is at a
(c) 9 : 4 (d) 25 : 16 distance d (d  b) from the slits. Some wavelengths are
42 The angle of incidence at which reflected light is totally missing exactly in front of one slit. These wavelengths are
polarized for reflection from air to glass (refraction
index n) is b2 2 b2
(a)   (b)  
–1 –1 d d
(a) sin (n) (b) sin (1/n)
–1 –1
(c) tan (1/n) (d) tan (n) b2 2 b2
(c)   (d)  
3d 3d
43. The phenomena of interference is shown by
(a) Longitudinal mechanical waves only 48. Four light waves are represented by
(i) y = a1 sin  t (ii) y = a2 sin ( t +  )
(b) Transverse mechanical waves only
(iii) y = a1 sin 2 t (iv) y = a2 sin 2 ( t + )
(c) Electromagnetic waves only
Interference fringes may be observed due to
(d) All the above types of waves superposition of
44. In the far field diffraction pattern of a single slit under (a) (i) and (ii) (b) (i) and (iii)
polychromatic illumination, the first minimum with the (c) (ii) and (iv) (d) (iii) and (iv)
wavelength 1 is found to be coincident with the third maximum 49. A transparent slab of thickness t and refractive index  is
at 2. So inserted in front of upper slit of YDSE apparatus. The
(a) 31 = 0.32 (b) 31 = 2 wavelength of light used is . Assume that there is no
absorption of light by the slab. Mark the correct statement(s).
(c) 1 = 3.52 (d) 0.31 = 32
(a) The intensity of dark fringes will be 0, if slits are indentical.
45. A parallel monochromatic beam of light is incident at an
(b) The change in optical path due to insertion of plane is t.
angle  to the normal of a slit of width e. The central point
O of the screen will be dark if (c) The change in optical path due to insertion of plate is ( – 1) t
(d) For making intensity zero at centre of screen, the
S1 5
thickness can be .
2    1
O

S2
50. In Young’s double slit experiment with a source of light of
wavelength 6320Å, the first maxima will occur when
(a) e sin = n where n = 1, 3, 5 ... (a) Path difference is 9480 Å
(b) e sin  = n where n = 1, 2, 3 ...
(b) Phase difference is 2 radian
(c) e sin = (2n – 1) /2 where n = 1, 2, 3 ...
(c) Path difference is 6320 Å
(d) e cos = n where n = 1, 2, 3, 4 ...
(d) Phase difference is  radian
WAVE OPTICS 120

Integer Type Questions 53. Assertion : When a light wave travels from a rarer to a
51. In a YDSE ,  = 6000 Å; d = 6mm and D = 2 m; denser medium, it loses speed. The reduction in speed
–1 imply a reduction in energy carried by the light wave.
(i) Find the fringe width (in × 10 mm).
–1 Reason : The energy of a wave is proportional to velocity
(ii) Find the position of the 3rd maxima (in × 10 mm).
of wave.
(a) A (b) B
p (c) C (d) D
(e) E
S1 54. Statement-1 : In calculating the disturbance produced by
a pair of superimposed incoherent wave trains, you can
add their intensities.

Statement-2 : I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 cos . The average value of

S2 cos  = 0 for incoherent waves.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
52. A monochromatic beam of light of 6000 Å is used in YDSE 55. Assertion : Corpuscular theory fails in explaining the
setup. The two slits are covered with two thin films of equal velocities of light in air and water.
thickness t but of different refractive indices as shown in Reason :According to corpuscular theory, light
the figure. Considering the intensity of the incident beam should travel faster in denser medium than, in rarer
–4
on the slits to be I0, find the point on the screen (in × 10 m) medium.
at which intensity is I0 and is just above the central maxima.
(a) A (b) B
(Assume that there is no change in intensity of the light
(c) C (d) D
after passing through the films.)
(e) E
56. Statement-1 : In Young’s double-slit experiment, if intensity
of each source is I0, then minimum and maximum intensity
is zero and 4I0, respectively.
Statement-2 : InYoung’s double-slit experiment, energy
conservation is not followed.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
57. Statment-1 : Young’s experiment, the fringe width for dark
fringes is same as that of the white fringes.
Statement-2 : In Young’s double-slit experiment, the fringes
are performed with a source of white light, then only black
Consider t = .6 m, d = 1mm, D = 1m, where d and D have and bright fringes are observed.
their usual meaning.
(a) A (b) B
Assertion Reason (c) C (d) D
(A) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is 58. Statement-1 : In YDSE, if separation between the slits is
the correct explanation of the assertion. less than wavelength of light, then no interference pattern
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not can be observed.
the correct explanation of the assertion. Statement-2 : For interference pattern to be observed, light
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false. sources have to be coherent.
(D) If the assertion and reason both are false. (a) A (b) B
(E) If assertion is false but reason is true. (c) C (d) D
WAVE OPTICS 121

59. Assertion : No interference pattern is detected when 65. Assertion : Interference shows wave nature of light.
two coherent sources are infinitely close to each
Reason : Photoelectric effect proves particle nature of light.
other.
(a) A (b) B (c) C
Reason : The fringe width is inversely proportional to the
distance between the two slits. (d) D (e) E
(a) A (b) B (c) C 66. Assertion: In diffraction phenomenon different maximas
have different intensities.
(d) D (e) E
Reason: In interference different maximas have same
I intensities.
60. Assertion : In Young’s double slit experiment ratio m ax
Im in (a) A (b) B (c) C
is infinite. (d) D (e) E
Reason : If width of any one of the slits is slightly 67. Statement-1 : In Young’s experiment, for two coherent
increased, then this ratio will decrease.
2 
(a) A (b) B (c) C source, the resultant intensity is givenby I = 4I0 cos .
2
(d) D (e) E
Statement-2 : Ratio of maximum to minimum intensity is
61. Assertion : Two coherent sources transmit waves of equal
intensity I0. Resultant intensity at a point where path 2
Imax

 I1  I2  .
 2
difference is is also I0. Imin
3  I1  I 2 
Reason : In interference resultant intensity at any point is (a) A (b) B
the average intensity of two individual intensities.
(c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B (c) C
68. Statement-1 : While calculating intensities in interference
(d) D (e) E pattern, we can add the intensities of the individual waves.
62. Assertion : Thin films such as soap bubble or a thin layer Statement-2 : Principle of superposition is valid for linear
of oil on water show beautiful colours when illuminated waves.
by white light.
(a) A (b) B
Reason : It happens due to the interference of light
reflected from the upper surface of the thin film. (c) C (d) D

(a) A (b) B (c) C Match the Following

(d) D (e) E 69. In Young’s double slit experiment, match the following two
63. Assertion : If a glass slab is placed in front of one of the columns.
slits, then fringe width will decrease. Coulmn I Column II
Reason : Glass slab will produce an additional path (a) When width of one (p) maximum intensity will
difference slit is slightly increased increase
(a) A (b) B (c) C (b) When one slit is (q) maximum intensity will
(d) D (e) E closed decrease
64. Assertion : Interference pattern is made by using blue (c) When both the (r) maximum intensity will
light instead of red light, the fringes becomes
narrower. Sources are made remain same

Reason : In Young’s double slit experiment, fringe width incoherent

(d) When a glass slab (s) frings pattern will disappear
D
is given by relation B  . is inserted in front of
d
(a) A (b) B (c) C one of the slits

(d) D (e) E Note Assume absorption from glass slab to be negligible.

WAVE OPTICS 122

70. In normal YDSE experiment maximum intensity is 4I0. In 73. The phases of the light wave at c, d, e and f are c, d, e and
Column I, y-coordinate is given corresponding to centre f respectively. It is given that c f
line. In Column II resultant intensities are given. Match the
two columns. (a) c cannot be equal to d

Column I Column II (b) d can be equal to e

(a) y = D/d (p) I = I0 (c) (d – f) is equal to (c – e)
(b) y = D/2d (q) I = 2I0 (d) None of these
(c) y = D/3d (r) I = 4I0 Passage - 2
(d) y = D/4d (s) I = Zero
Using the following passage, Solve Q. 74 and 75
71. In normal YDSE experiment match the following two
columns. When light from two sources (say slits S1 and S2) interfere,
Column I Column II they from alternate dark and bright fringes. Bright fringes is
formed at all points where the path difference is an odd
(a) In YDSE apparatus (p) fringe width will increase
multiple of half wavelength. At the condition of equal
is immersed in a liquid 2
amplitudes, A1 = A2 = a, the maximum intensity will be 4a
(b) When wavelength (q) fringe width will decrease and the visibility improves. The resultant intensity can also
of ligth used in increased 2 2
be indicated with phase factors as I = 2a cos (/2). Using
(c) When distance (r) fringe width will remain this passage, answer the following questions.
between slits and constant

screen (D) is 74. If the path difference between the slits S1 and S2 is , the
2
increased
central fringe will have an intensity of
(d) When distance (s) fringe pattern will disappear
2
between two slits (a) 0 (b) a
2 2
(d) is increased (c) 2a (d) 4a
Passage - 1 75. If the slits S1 and S2 are arranged as shown, the ratio of
intensity of fringe at P and R is
Using the following passage, Solve Q. 72 and 73
R
The figure shows a surface XY separating two transparent
media, medium–1 and medium–2. The lines ab and cd (path difference)
represent wavefronts of a light wave travelling in medium– P
1 and incident on XY. The lines ef and gh represent
wavefronts of the light wave in medium–2 after refraction.
S1 S2
72. Light travels as a
(a) 0 (b) 
h (c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
d

medium - 1 Passage - 3
e c Using the following passage, Solve Q. 76 to 77
X Y
f h
In Young’s double-slit experiment setup with light of
medium - 2
e wavelength  = 6000 Å, distance betwen the two slits is
g
2mm and distance between the plane of slits and the screen
(a) parallel beam in each medium in 2m. The slits are of equal intensity. When a sheet of glass
(b) convergent medium of refractive index 1.5 (which permits only a fraction of the
incident light to pass through) and thickness 8000 Å is placed
(c) divergent beam in each medium
in front of the lower slit, it is observed that the intensity at a
(d) divergent beam in one medium and convergent beam point P, 0.15 mm above the central maxima, does not change.
in the other medium.
WAVE OPTICS 123

y
S1

S2

76. The phase difference at point P without inserting the slab is

(a) 3 /4 (b) /4
(c) 2 (d) /3
77. Intensity at point P is
(a) 3I0 (b) I0
(c) 2I0 (d) 8I0
WAVE OPTICS 124

EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

(a) What is the shape of the interference fringes on the
1. In a double slit experiment instead of taking slits of
screen ?
equal widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the
other. Then, in the interference pattern (2000) (b) Calculate the ratio of the minimum to the maximum
intensities in the interference fringes formed near the
(a) the intensities of both the maxima and the minima
point P (shown in the figure).
increase
(c) If the intensity at point P corresponds to a maximum,
(b) the intensity of the maxima increases and the minima
has zero intensity calculate the minimum distance through which the
reflecting surface AB should be shifted so that the
(c) the intensity of the maxima decreases and that of the
intensity at P again becomes maximum.
minima increases
(d) the intensity of the maxima decreases and the minima 4. Two beams of light having intensities I & 4I interfere to
has zero intensity. produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The phase difference
between the beams is /2 at point A and  at point B. Then
2. A vessel ABCD of 10 cm width has two small slits S1 and
S2 sealed with identical glass plates of equal thickness. the difference between the resultant intensities at A and B
The distance between the slits is 0.8 mm. POQ is the line is (2001)
perpendicular to the plane AB and passing through O, (a) 4I (b) 2I
the middle point of S1 and S2. A monochromatic light
(c) 5I (d) 7I
source is kept at S, 40 cm below P and 2 m from the
vessel, to illuminate the slits as shown in the figure below. 5. In Young’s double slit experiment, 12 fringes are observed
Calculate the position of the central bright fringe on the to be formed in a certain segment of the screen when light
other wall CD with respect to the line QQ. Now, a liquid is of wavelength 600 nm is used. If the wavelength of light is
poured into the vessel and filled upto OQ. The central changed to 400 nm, number of fringes observed in the
bright fringe is found to be at Q. Calculate the refractive same segment of the screen in given by (2001)
index of the liquid. (2001)
(a) 12 (b) 18
A (c) 24 (d) 30
D
6. In the ideal double-slit experiment when a glass-plate
P S1
Q (refractive index 1.5) of thickness t is introduced in the
O
40 cm S2 path of one of the interfering beams (wavelength ), the
intensity at the position where the central maximum
S B C occurred previously remains unchanged. The minimum
2m 10m thickness of the glass-plate is (2002)
(a) 2 (b) 2/3
3. A point source S emitting light of wavelength 600 nm is
placed at a very small height h above a flat reflecting (c) /3 (d) 
surface AB (see figure). The intensity of the reflected light 7. Monochromatic light of wavelength 400 nm and 560 nm
is 36% of the incident intensity. Interference fringes are are incident simultaneously and normally on double slit
observed on a screen placed parallel to the reflecting apparatus whose slit separation is 0.1 mm and screen
surface at a very large distance D from it. (2001) distance is 1 m. Distance between areas of total darkness
will be (2004)
P
Screen
(a) 4 mm (b) 5.6 mm
(c) 14 mm (d) 28 mm
D 8. In Young’s double slit experiment intensity at a point is (1/4)
S
of the maximum intensity. Angular position of this point is
h (2005)
–1 –1
A B (a) sin (/d) (b) sin (/2d)
–1 –1
(c) sin (/3d) (d) sin (/4d)
WAVE OPTICS 125

9. Column I : Shows four situations of standard Young’s

double slit arrangement with the screen placed far away
from slits, S1 and S2. In each of these cases S1P0= S2P0,

S1P1  S2 P1  and S1P2  S2 P4   , where  is the (b)
4 3
wavelength of the light used. In the cases B, C and D, a
transparent sheet of refractive index  and thickness t is
pasted on slit S2. The thickness of the sheets are different
in different cases. The phase difference between the light
waves reaching a point P on the screen from the two slits
is denoted by (P) and intensity by I (P). Match each
situation given in Column I with the statement(s) in
(c)
Column II valid for that situation. (2009)
Column I Column II

(a)    1 t  0 (p) (P0) = 0

(d)


(b)    1 t  (q) (P1) = 0
4
11. In the Young’s double slit experiment using a
monochromatic light of wavelenght  the path difference
(in terms of an interger n) corresponding to any point
having half the peak intensity is (2013)

(c)    1 t  (r) (P1) = 0
(a)  2n  1

(b)  2n  1

2
2 4

 
(c)  2n  1 (d)  2n  1
8 16
3 12. A light source, which emits two wavelengths 1 = 400 nm
(d)    1 t  (s) (P0) > I (P1) and 2 = 600 nm, is used Young’s double slit experiment. If
4
recorded fringe widths for 1 and 2 are 1 and 2 = and
the number of fringes for them within a distance y on one
(t) I (P2) > I (P1) side of the central maximum are m1 and m2 respectively,
10. A light ray travelling in glass medium is incident on glass- then : (2014)
air interface at an angle of incidence . The reflected (R) (a) 2 > 1
and transmitted (T) intensities, both as function of , are (b) m1 > m2
plotted. The correct sketch is : (2011) (c) from the central maximum, 3rd maximum of 2 overlaps
with 5th minimum of 1
(d) the angular separation of fringes of 1 is greater than
2 .
13. A light source, which emits two wavelengths 1 = 400 nm
(a) and 2 = 600 nm, is used in a Young’s double slit experiment.
If recorded fringe widths for 1 and 2 are 1 and 2 and the
number of fringes for them within a distance y on one side of
the central maximum are m1 and m2, respectively, then (2014)
WAVE OPTICS 126

(a) 2 > 1 16. Two coherent monochromatic point surface S1 and S2 of

(b) m1 > m2 wavelength  = 600 nm are placed symmetrically on either
side of the center of the circle as shown. The sources are
(c) From the central maximum, 3rd maximum of 2 overlaps
separated by a distance d = 1.8 mm. This arrangement
with 5th minimum of 1.
produces interference fringes visible as alternate bright and
(d) The angular separation of fringes for 1 is greater than 2 dark spots on the circumference of the circle. The angular
14. While conducting the Young’s double slit experiment, a separation between two consecutive bright spots is .
student replaced the two slits with a large opaque plate in Which of the following options is/are correct ? (2017)
the x-y plane containing two small holes that act as two
coherent point sources (S1, S2) emitting light of wave-
length 600 nm. The student mistakenly placed the screen
parallel to the x-z plane (for z > 0) at a distance D = 3 m
from the mid-point of S1S2, as shown schematically in the
figure. The distance between the sources d = 0.6003 mm.
The origin O is at the intersection of the screen and the
line joining S1S2. Which of the following is(are) true of
the intensity pattern on the screen? (2016)
(a) The angular separation between two consecutive bright
spots decreases as we move from P1 to P2 along the first
quadrant
(b) A dark spot will be formed at the point P2\
(c) The total number of fringes produced between P1 and
P2 in the first quadrant is close to 3000
(d) At P2 the order of the fringe will be maximum.
17. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slit separation d is
0.3 mm and the screen distance D is 1m. A parallel beam of
(a) Semi circular bright and dark bands centered at point O light of wavelength 600 nm is incident on the slits at angle
(b) Hyperbolic bright and dark bands with foci  as shown in figure. On the screen, the point O is
symmetrically placed about O in the x-direction
equidistant from the slits and distance PO is 11.0 mm.
(c) The region very close to the point O will be dark
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
(d) Straight bright and dark bands parallel to the x-axis
(2019/Shift -2)
15. For an isosceles prism of angle A and refractive index , it
is found that the angle of minimum deviation m=A. Which
of the following options is/are correct? (2017)
(a) At minimum deviation, the incident angle i1 and the
refracting angle r1 at the first refracting surface are related
by r1  (i1 / 2)
(b) For this prism, the refractive index  and the angle of

1  (a) For  = 0, there will be constructive interference at point

prism A are related as A cos 1   P.
2 2
0.36
(c) For the angle of incidence i1 = A, the ray inside the (b) For α = degree, there will be destructive
π
prism is parallel to the base of the prism
interference at point P.
(d) For this prism, the emergent ray at the second surface
will be tangential to the surface when the angle of incidence 0.36
(c) For α = degree, there will be destructive
π
 A 
at the first surface is i1  sin 1 sin A 4cos2 1  cos A  interference at point O.
 2  (d) Fringe spacing depends on 
WAVE OPTICS 127

18. A parallel beam of light strikes a piece of transparent glass 19. A glass plate of refractive index 1.5 is coated with a thin
layer of thickness t and refractive index 1.8. Light of
having cross section as shown in the figure below. Correct
wavelength  travelling in air is incident normally on the
shape of the emergent wavefront will be (figures are layer. It is partly reflected at the upper and the lower
schematic and not drawn to scale) – surfaces of the layer and the two reflected rays interfere.
(2020/Shift -1) Write the condition for their constructive interference. If
= 648 nm, obtain the least value of t for which the rays
interfere constructively. (2000)

(a) (b)

(c) (d)
WAVE OPTICS 128

WAVE OPTICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
 129

Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 RAY OPTICS

EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (c) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (b)

9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (d)

13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (a) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (b)

17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (d) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(b) 24. (a) 21. (0.32) 22. (b) 23.(a) 24. (a)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (d) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (a) 29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(c) 36. (b) 33. (d) 34. (a) 35.(d) 36. (c)
37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (a) 37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (a) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (a, c) 43. (b) 44. (a) 41. (d) 42. (090.00) 43. (001.58) 44. (a)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (b) 45. (001.00) 46. (006.25) 47. (005.00) 48. (b)
49. (b) 50. (a) 51. (b) 52. (d) 49. (050.00) 50. (005.00) 51. (d) 52. (a)
53. (d) 54. (c) 55. (d) 56. (d) 53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (a) 56. (60.00)
57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (a) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (b) 64. (a)
65. (d) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (c)
69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (b) 72. (d)
73. (b) 74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (c)
77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (d) 80. (b)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (b)
85. (c) 86. (d) 87. (b) 88. (b)
89. (b) 90. (c) 91. (c) 92. (b)
93. (a) 94. (c)
ANSWER KEY 130

EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (d)

5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c) 9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (b) 17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23.(c) 24. (b) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(a) 24. (b)
25. (6) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (d) 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(b) 36. (d) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35.(c,d) 36. (a,b,c)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (c) 37. (a,c) 38. (a,c) 39. (a,d) 40. (a,c,d)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (a,b,c) 41. (a,b,c) 42. (a,b,d) 43. (a,d)
45. (d) 46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (c) 44. (15cm, –3/2) 45. (a) 4° ; (b) –0.04°
49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (a)
46. (1.6) 47. (a) zero ; 1500 Å
53. (a) 54. (a,b,c) 55. (a,c) 56. (a,c)
57. (a,b,c,d) 58. (a,b,c,d) 59. (a,d) 60. (b,c) 3 R
48. 49. (6.06m)
61. (b,c,d) 62. (a,d) 63. (a,c) 64. (b,c) 3  1
65. (a,b,c) 66. (a,b,c) 67. (a,c) 68. (a,c)
50. (0.09 m/s, 0.3 m/s) 51. (60°)
69. (a,c) 70. (b,d) 71. (b,c) 72. (a,c)
73. (225) 74. (36) 75. (2) 76. (3) 52. (a) 60° , (b) 60° 53. (7)
77. (2) 78. (80) 79. (d) 80. (d) 54. (2) 55. (8)
81. (c) 82. (a) 83. (c) 84. (d) 56. (50.00) 57. (0.69)
85. (c) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (a) 58. (1.00) 59. (002.00)
89. (a) 90. (a) 91. (a)
60. (c)
92. (A  R, Q; B  P, R;C  P,S; D  P, R) 61. (a)  P,Q,R,S; (b)  Q; (c)  P,Q,R,S; (d)  P,Q,R,S
93. (A  S; B  P;C  S; D  Q)
62. (A  p, r; B  q,s, t;C  p, r, t; D  q,s)
94. (a-r; b-s;c-q;d-q)
63. (d) 64. (b) 65. (130)
95. (a-p; b-r; c-q;d-s)

96. (a - p,r; b -q,r; c - q,r;d - q,r)

 131

Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 WAVE OPTICS
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b)

5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (d) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (0.50)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23.(a) 24. (a) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(c) 24. (a)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d) 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (d) 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (200.00)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(d) 36. (a,d) 33. (b) 34. (9.00) 35.(d) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (d) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (750.00)
41. (d) 42. (b,d) 43. (c) 44. (c) 41. (a) 42. (d)
45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (c)
49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (d)
53. (a) 54. (c) 55. (a) 56. (b)
57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (c) 64. (b)
65. (a) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (c) 71. (d) 72. (b)
73. (c) 74. (d) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (c) 78. (d) 79. (d) 80. (c)
81. (c) 71. (a) 82. (a) 83. (a)
ANSWER KEY 132

EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b) 1. (a)

5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a)
2. (2 cm about point Q on side CD, m = 1.0016)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
3. (a) Circular ; (b) 1 : 16; (c) 300 nm
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a)
4. (a) 5. (b)
17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
6. (a) 7. (d)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23.(a) 24. (d)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (a) 8. (c) 9. (a-p,s) ; (b-q) ; (c-t) ; (d-r, s,t)
29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (d) 10. (c) 11. (b)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(c) 36. (b)
12. (a,b,c) 13. (a,b,c)
37. (a) 38. (0005) 39. (a) 40. (0000)
14. (a,c) 15. (a,c,d)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (d) 44. (c)
45. (b) 46. (b,d) 47. (a,c) 48. (a,d) 16. (c,d) 17. (b)
49. (a,c,d) 50. (b,c) 51. (0.2mm) 52. (20) 18. (a) 19. (90mm)
53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (a) 56. (c)
57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (a) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (d) 64. (a)
65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (d)
69. (a  p; b  q,s; c  q,s;d  r)

70. (a  r; b  s;c  p;d  q)

71. (a  q; b  p;c  p;d  q)

72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (a) 75. (a)

76. (c) 77. (c)
Note